xlcloud / papers / 2014 / kwapi / IEEEtran.cls @ 5e8b7c49
Historique | Voir | Annoter | Télécharger (202,53 ko)
1 |
%% |
---|---|
2 |
%% IEEEtran.cls 2011/11/03 version V1.8 based on |
3 |
%% IEEEtran.cls 2007/03/05 version V1.7a |
4 |
%% The changes in V1.8 are made with a single goal in mind: |
5 |
%% to change the look of the output using the [conference] option |
6 |
%% and the default font size (10pt) to match the Word template more closely. |
7 |
%% These changes may well have undesired side effects when other options |
8 |
%% are in force! |
9 |
%% |
10 |
%% |
11 |
%% This is the official IEEE LaTeX class for authors of the Institute of |
12 |
%% Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Transactions journals and |
13 |
%% conferences. |
14 |
%% |
15 |
%% Support sites: |
16 |
%% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/ |
17 |
%% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/ |
18 |
%% and |
19 |
%% http://www.ieee.org/ |
20 |
%% |
21 |
%% Based on the original 1993 IEEEtran.cls, but with many bug fixes |
22 |
%% and enhancements (from both JVH and MDS) over the 1996/7 version. |
23 |
%% |
24 |
%% |
25 |
%% Contributors: |
26 |
%% Gerry Murray (1993), Silvano Balemi (1993), |
27 |
%% Jon Dixon (1996), Peter N"uchter (1996), |
28 |
%% Juergen von Hagen (2000), and Michael Shell (2001-2007) |
29 |
%% |
30 |
%% |
31 |
%% Copyright (c) 1993-2000 by Gerry Murray, Silvano Balemi, |
32 |
%% Jon Dixon, Peter N"uchter, |
33 |
%% Juergen von Hagen |
34 |
%% and |
35 |
%% Copyright (c) 2001-2007 by Michael Shell |
36 |
%% |
37 |
%% Current maintainer (V1.3 to V1.7): Michael Shell |
38 |
%% See: |
39 |
%% http://www.michaelshell.org/ |
40 |
%% for current contact information. |
41 |
%% |
42 |
%% Special thanks to Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau |
43 |
%% for allowing the inclusion of the \@ifmtarg command |
44 |
%% from their ifmtarg LaTeX package. |
45 |
%% |
46 |
%%************************************************************************* |
47 |
%% Legal Notice: |
48 |
%% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or |
49 |
%% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or |
50 |
%% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE! |
51 |
%% User assumes all risk. |
52 |
%% In no event shall IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for |
53 |
%% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental, |
54 |
%% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse |
55 |
%% of any information contained here. |
56 |
%% |
57 |
%% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not |
58 |
%% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE. |
59 |
%% |
60 |
%% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) |
61 |
%% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used, |
62 |
%% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included |
63 |
%% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released |
64 |
%% 2003/12/01 or later. |
65 |
%% Retain all contribution notices and credits. |
66 |
%% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including ** |
67 |
%% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. ** |
68 |
%% |
69 |
%% File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex, |
70 |
%% bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex |
71 |
%% |
72 |
%% Major changes to the user interface should be indicated by an |
73 |
%% increase in the version numbers. If a version is a beta, it will |
74 |
%% be indicated with a BETA suffix, i.e., 1.4 BETA. |
75 |
%% Small changes can be indicated by appending letters to the version |
76 |
%% such as "IEEEtran_v14a.cls". |
77 |
%% In all cases, \Providesclass, any \typeout messages to the user, |
78 |
%% \IEEEtransversionmajor and \IEEEtransversionminor must reflect the |
79 |
%% correct version information. |
80 |
%% The changes should also be documented via source comments. |
81 |
%%************************************************************************* |
82 |
%% |
83 |
% |
84 |
% Available class options |
85 |
% e.g., \documentclass[10pt,conference]{IEEEtran} |
86 |
% |
87 |
% *** choose only one from each category *** |
88 |
% |
89 |
% 9pt, 10pt, 11pt, 12pt |
90 |
% Sets normal font size. The default is 10pt. |
91 |
% |
92 |
% conference, journal, technote, peerreview, peerreviewca |
93 |
% determines format mode - conference papers, journal papers, |
94 |
% correspondence papers (technotes), or peer review papers. The user |
95 |
% should also select 9pt when using technote. peerreview is like |
96 |
% journal mode, but provides for a single-column "cover" title page for |
97 |
% anonymous peer review. The paper title (without the author names) is |
98 |
% repeated at the top of the page after the cover page. For peer review |
99 |
% papers, the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle command must be executed (will |
100 |
% automatically be ignored for non-peerreview modes) at the place the |
101 |
% cover page is to end, usually just after the abstract (keywords are |
102 |
% not normally used with peer review papers). peerreviewca is like |
103 |
% peerreview, but allows the author names to be entered and formatted |
104 |
% as with conference mode so that author affiliation and contact |
105 |
% information can be easily seen on the cover page. |
106 |
% The default is journal. |
107 |
% |
108 |
% draft, draftcls, draftclsnofoot, final |
109 |
% determines if paper is formatted as a widely spaced draft (for |
110 |
% handwritten editor comments) or as a properly typeset final version. |
111 |
% draftcls restricts draft mode to the class file while all other LaTeX |
112 |
% packages (i.e., \usepackage{graphicx}) will behave as final - allows |
113 |
% for a draft paper with visible figures, etc. draftclsnofoot is like |
114 |
% draftcls, but does not display the date and the word "DRAFT" at the foot |
115 |
% of the pages. If using one of the draft modes, the user will probably |
116 |
% also want to select onecolumn. |
117 |
% The default is final. |
118 |
% |
119 |
% letterpaper, a4paper |
120 |
% determines paper size: 8.5in X 11in or 210mm X 297mm. CHANGING THE PAPER |
121 |
% SIZE WILL NOT ALTER THE TYPESETTING OF THE DOCUMENT - ONLY THE MARGINS |
122 |
% WILL BE AFFECTED. In particular, documents using the a4paper option will |
123 |
% have reduced side margins (A4 is narrower than US letter) and a longer |
124 |
% bottom margin (A4 is longer than US letter). For both cases, the top |
125 |
% margins will be the same and the text will be horizontally centered. |
126 |
% For final submission to IEEE, authors should use US letter (8.5 X 11in) |
127 |
% paper. Note that authors should ensure that all post-processing |
128 |
% (ps, pdf, etc.) uses the same paper specificiation as the .tex document. |
129 |
% Problems here are by far the number one reason for incorrect margins. |
130 |
% IEEEtran will automatically set the default paper size under pdflatex |
131 |
% (without requiring a change to pdftex.cfg), so this issue is more |
132 |
% important to dvips users. Fix config.ps, config.pdf, or ~/.dvipsrc for |
133 |
% dvips, or use the dvips -t papersize option instead as needed. See the |
134 |
% testflow documentation |
135 |
% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/testflow |
136 |
% for more details on dvips paper size configuration. |
137 |
% The default is letterpaper. |
138 |
% |
139 |
% oneside, twoside |
140 |
% determines if layout follows single sided or two sided (duplex) |
141 |
% printing. The only notable change is with the headings at the top of |
142 |
% the pages. |
143 |
% The default is oneside. |
144 |
% |
145 |
% onecolumn, twocolumn |
146 |
% determines if text is organized into one or two columns per page. One |
147 |
% column mode is usually used only with draft papers. |
148 |
% The default is twocolumn. |
149 |
% |
150 |
% compsoc |
151 |
% Use the format of the IEEE Computer Society. |
152 |
% |
153 |
% romanappendices |
154 |
% Use the "Appendix I" convention when numbering appendices. IEEEtran.cls |
155 |
% now defaults to Alpha "Appendix A" convention - the opposite of what |
156 |
% v1.6b and earlier did. |
157 |
% |
158 |
% captionsoff |
159 |
% disables the display of the figure/table captions. Some IEEE journals |
160 |
% request that captions be removed and figures/tables be put on pages |
161 |
% of their own at the end of an initial paper submission. The endfloat |
162 |
% package can be used with this class option to achieve this format. |
163 |
% |
164 |
% nofonttune |
165 |
% turns off tuning of the font interword spacing. Maybe useful to those |
166 |
% not using the standard Times fonts or for those who have already "tuned" |
167 |
% their fonts. |
168 |
% The default is to enable IEEEtran to tune font parameters. |
169 |
% |
170 |
% |
171 |
%---------- |
172 |
% Available CLASSINPUTs provided (all are macros unless otherwise noted): |
173 |
% \CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch |
174 |
% \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin |
175 |
% \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin |
176 |
% \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin |
177 |
% \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin |
178 |
% |
179 |
% Available CLASSINFOs provided: |
180 |
% \ifCLASSINFOpdf (TeX if conditional) |
181 |
% \CLASSINFOpaperwidth (macro) |
182 |
% \CLASSINFOpaperheight (macro) |
183 |
% \CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip (length) |
184 |
% \CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip (length) |
185 |
% |
186 |
% Available CLASSOPTIONs provided: |
187 |
% all class option flags (TeX if conditionals) unless otherwise noted, |
188 |
% e.g., \ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff |
189 |
% point size options provided as a single macro: |
190 |
% \CLASSOPTIONpt |
191 |
% which will be defined as 9, 10, 11, or 12 depending on the document's |
192 |
% normalsize point size. |
193 |
% also, class option peerreviewca implies the use of class option peerreview |
194 |
% and classoption draft implies the use of class option draftcls |
195 |
|
196 |
|
197 |
|
198 |
|
199 |
|
200 |
\ProvidesClass{IEEEtran}[2012/11/21 V1.8c by Harald Hanche-Olsen and Anders Christensen] |
201 |
\typeout{-- Based on V1.7a by Michael Shell} |
202 |
\typeout{-- See the "IEEEtran_HOWTO" manual for usage information.} |
203 |
\typeout{-- http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/} |
204 |
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} |
205 |
|
206 |
% IEEEtran.cls version numbers, provided as of V1.3 |
207 |
% These values serve as a way a .tex file can |
208 |
% determine if the new features are provided. |
209 |
% The version number of this IEEEtrans.cls can be obtained from |
210 |
% these values. i.e., V1.4 |
211 |
% KEEP THESE AS INTEGERS! i.e., NO {4a} or anything like that- |
212 |
% (no need to enumerate "a" minor changes here) |
213 |
\def\IEEEtransversionmajor{1} |
214 |
\def\IEEEtransversionminor{7} |
215 |
|
216 |
% These do nothing, but provide them like in article.cls |
217 |
\newif\if@restonecol |
218 |
\newif\if@titlepage |
219 |
|
220 |
|
221 |
% class option conditionals |
222 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONonecolumn \CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse |
223 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn \CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue |
224 |
|
225 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONoneside \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue |
226 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside \CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse |
227 |
|
228 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONfinal \CLASSOPTIONfinaltrue |
229 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraft \CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse |
230 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse |
231 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse |
232 |
|
233 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse |
234 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse |
235 |
|
236 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONjournal \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue |
237 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONconference \CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse |
238 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote \CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse |
239 |
|
240 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune \CLASSOPTIONnofonttunefalse |
241 |
|
242 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff \CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofffalse |
243 |
|
244 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc \CLASSOPTIONcompsocfalse |
245 |
|
246 |
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices \CLASSOPTIONromanappendicesfalse |
247 |
|
248 |
|
249 |
% class info conditionals |
250 |
|
251 |
% indicates if pdf (via pdflatex) output |
252 |
\newif\ifCLASSINFOpdf \CLASSINFOpdffalse |
253 |
|
254 |
|
255 |
% V1.6b internal flag to show if using a4paper |
256 |
\newif\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse |
257 |
|
258 |
|
259 |
|
260 |
% IEEEtran class scratch pad registers |
261 |
% dimen |
262 |
\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA |
263 |
\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB |
264 |
% count |
265 |
\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountA |
266 |
\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountB |
267 |
% token list |
268 |
\newtoks\@IEEEtrantmptoksA |
269 |
|
270 |
% we use \CLASSOPTIONpt so that we can ID the point size (even for 9pt docs) |
271 |
% as well as LaTeX's \@ptsize to retain some compatability with some |
272 |
% external packages |
273 |
\def\@ptsize{0} |
274 |
% LaTeX does not support 9pt, so we set \@ptsize to 0 - same as that of 10pt |
275 |
\DeclareOption{9pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{9}\def\@ptsize{0}} |
276 |
\DeclareOption{10pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{10}\def\@ptsize{0}} |
277 |
\DeclareOption{11pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{11}\def\@ptsize{1}} |
278 |
\DeclareOption{12pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{12}\def\@ptsize{2}} |
279 |
|
280 |
|
281 |
|
282 |
\DeclareOption{letterpaper}{\setlength{\paperheight}{11in}% |
283 |
\setlength{\paperwidth}{8.5in}% |
284 |
\@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse |
285 |
\def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{letter}% |
286 |
\def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{8.5in}% |
287 |
\def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{11in}} |
288 |
|
289 |
|
290 |
\DeclareOption{a4paper}{\setlength{\paperheight}{297mm}% |
291 |
\setlength{\paperwidth}{210mm}% |
292 |
\@IEEEusingAfourpapertrue |
293 |
\def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{a4}% |
294 |
\def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{210mm}% |
295 |
\def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{297mm}} |
296 |
|
297 |
\DeclareOption{oneside}{\@twosidefalse\@mparswitchfalse |
298 |
\CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue\CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse} |
299 |
\DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue\@mparswitchtrue |
300 |
\CLASSOPTIONtwosidetrue\CLASSOPTIONonesidefalse} |
301 |
|
302 |
\DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONonecolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumnfalse} |
303 |
\DeclareOption{twocolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse} |
304 |
|
305 |
% If the user selects draft, then this class AND any packages |
306 |
% will go into draft mode. |
307 |
\DeclareOption{draft}{\CLASSOPTIONdrafttrue\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue |
308 |
\CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} |
309 |
% draftcls is for a draft mode which will not affect any packages |
310 |
% used by the document. |
311 |
\DeclareOption{draftcls}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue |
312 |
\CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} |
313 |
% draftclsnofoot is like draftcls, but without the footer. |
314 |
\DeclareOption{draftclsnofoot}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue |
315 |
\CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoottrue} |
316 |
\DeclareOption{final}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse |
317 |
\CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} |
318 |
|
319 |
\DeclareOption{journal}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse |
320 |
\CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} |
321 |
|
322 |
\DeclareOption{conference}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse |
323 |
\CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencetrue\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} |
324 |
|
325 |
\DeclareOption{technote}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse |
326 |
\CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotetrue} |
327 |
|
328 |
\DeclareOption{peerreview}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse |
329 |
\CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} |
330 |
|
331 |
\DeclareOption{peerreviewca}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcatrue |
332 |
\CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} |
333 |
|
334 |
\DeclareOption{nofonttune}{\CLASSOPTIONnofonttunetrue} |
335 |
|
336 |
\DeclareOption{captionsoff}{\CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofftrue} |
337 |
|
338 |
\DeclareOption{compsoc}{\CLASSOPTIONcompsoctrue} |
339 |
|
340 |
\DeclareOption{romanappendices}{\CLASSOPTIONromanappendicestrue} |
341 |
|
342 |
|
343 |
% default to US letter paper, 10pt, twocolumn, one sided, final, journal |
344 |
\ExecuteOptions{letterpaper,10pt,twocolumn,oneside,final,journal} |
345 |
% overrride these defaults per user requests |
346 |
\ProcessOptions |
347 |
|
348 |
|
349 |
|
350 |
% Computer Society conditional execution command |
351 |
\long\def\@IEEEcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\relax#1\relax\fi\relax} |
352 |
% inverse |
353 |
\long\def\@IEEEnotcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\relax#1\relax\fi\relax} |
354 |
% compsoc conference |
355 |
\long\def\@IEEEcompsocconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax} |
356 |
% compsoc not conference |
357 |
\long\def\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax} |
358 |
|
359 |
|
360 |
% IEEE uses Times Roman font, so we'll default to Times. |
361 |
% These three commands make up the entire times.sty package. |
362 |
\renewcommand{\sfdefault}{phv} |
363 |
\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ptm} |
364 |
\renewcommand{\ttdefault}{pcr} |
365 |
|
366 |
\@IEEEcompsoconly{\typeout{-- Using IEEE Computer Society mode.}} |
367 |
|
368 |
% V1.7 compsoc nonconference papers, use Palatino/Palladio as the main text font, |
369 |
% not Times Roman. |
370 |
\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ppl}} |
371 |
|
372 |
% enable Times/Palatino main text font |
373 |
\normalfont\selectfont |
374 |
|
375 |
|
376 |
|
377 |
|
378 |
|
379 |
% V1.7 conference notice message hook |
380 |
\def\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference{\typeout{}% |
381 |
\typeout{** Conference Paper **}% |
382 |
\typeout{Before submitting the final camera ready copy, remember to:}% |
383 |
\typeout{}% |
384 |
\typeout{ 1. Manually equalize the lengths of two columns on the last page}% |
385 |
\typeout{ of your paper;}% |
386 |
\typeout{}% |
387 |
\typeout{ 2. Ensure that any PostScript and/or PDF output post-processing}% |
388 |
\typeout{ uses only Type 1 fonts and that every step in the generation}% |
389 |
\typeout{ process uses the appropriate paper size.}% |
390 |
\typeout{}} |
391 |
|
392 |
|
393 |
% we can send console reminder messages to the user here |
394 |
\AtEndDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference\fi} |
395 |
|
396 |
|
397 |
% warn about the use of single column other than for draft mode |
398 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn\else% |
399 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls\else% |
400 |
\typeout{** ATTENTION: Single column mode is not typically used with IEEE publications.}% |
401 |
\fi% |
402 |
\fi |
403 |
|
404 |
|
405 |
% V1.7 improved paper size setting code. |
406 |
% Set pdfpage and dvips paper sizes. Conditional tests are similar to that |
407 |
% of ifpdf.sty. Retain within {} to ensure tested macros are never altered, |
408 |
% even if only effect is to set them to \relax. |
409 |
% if \pdfoutput is undefined or equal to relax, output a dvips special |
410 |
{\@ifundefined{pdfoutput}{\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}}{% |
411 |
% pdfoutput is defined and not equal to \relax |
412 |
% check for pdfpageheight existence just in case someone sets pdfoutput |
413 |
% under non-pdflatex. If exists, set them regardless of value of \pdfoutput. |
414 |
\@ifundefined{pdfpageheight}{\relax}{\global\pdfpagewidth\paperwidth |
415 |
\global\pdfpageheight\paperheight}% |
416 |
% if using \pdfoutput=0 under pdflatex, send dvips papersize special |
417 |
\ifcase\pdfoutput |
418 |
\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}% |
419 |
\else |
420 |
% we are using pdf output, set CLASSINFOpdf flag |
421 |
\global\CLASSINFOpdftrue |
422 |
\fi}} |
423 |
|
424 |
% let the user know the selected papersize |
425 |
\typeout{-- Using \CLASSINFOpaperwidth\space x \CLASSINFOpaperheight\space |
426 |
(\CLASSOPTIONpaper)\space paper.} |
427 |
|
428 |
\ifCLASSINFOpdf |
429 |
\typeout{-- Using PDF output.} |
430 |
\else |
431 |
\typeout{-- Using DVI output.} |
432 |
\fi |
433 |
|
434 |
|
435 |
% The idea hinted here is for LaTeX to generate markleft{} and markright{} |
436 |
% automatically for you after you enter \author{}, \journal{}, |
437 |
% \journaldate{}, journalvol{}, \journalnum{}, etc. |
438 |
% However, there may be some backward compatibility issues here as |
439 |
% well as some special applications for IEEEtran.cls and special issues |
440 |
% that may require the flexible \markleft{}, \markright{} and/or \markboth{}. |
441 |
% We'll leave this as an open future suggestion. |
442 |
%\newcommand{\journal}[1]{\def\@journal{#1}} |
443 |
%\def\@journal{} |
444 |
|
445 |
|
446 |
|
447 |
% pointsize values |
448 |
% used with ifx to determine the document's normal size |
449 |
\def\@IEEEptsizenine{9} |
450 |
\def\@IEEEptsizeten{10} |
451 |
\def\@IEEEptsizeeleven{11} |
452 |
\def\@IEEEptsizetwelve{12} |
453 |
|
454 |
|
455 |
|
456 |
% FONT DEFINITIONS (No sizexx.clo file needed) |
457 |
% V1.6 revised font sizes, displayskip values and |
458 |
% revised normalsize baselineskip to reduce underfull vbox problems |
459 |
% on the 58pc = 696pt = 9.5in text height we want |
460 |
% normalsize #lines/column baselineskip (aka leading) |
461 |
% 9pt 63 11.0476pt (truncated down) |
462 |
% 10pt 58 12pt (exact) |
463 |
% 11pt 52 13.3846pt (truncated down) |
464 |
% 12pt 50 13.92pt (exact) |
465 |
% |
466 |
|
467 |
% we need to store the nominal baselineskip for the given font size |
468 |
% in case baselinestretch ever changes. |
469 |
% this is a dimen, so it will not hold stretch or shrink |
470 |
\newdimen\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip |
471 |
\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\baselineskip |
472 |
|
473 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine |
474 |
\typeout{-- This is a 9 point document.} |
475 |
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9}{11.0476pt}}% |
476 |
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.0476pt}% |
477 |
\normalsize |
478 |
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus3pt minus1pt% |
479 |
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% |
480 |
\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus3pt% |
481 |
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus3pt minus1pt |
482 |
\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{8.5}{10pt}} |
483 |
\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}} |
484 |
\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}} |
485 |
\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}} |
486 |
% sublargesize is the same as large - 10pt |
487 |
\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{10}{12pt}} |
488 |
\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{10}{12pt}} |
489 |
\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{12}{14pt}} |
490 |
\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{14}{17pt}} |
491 |
\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{17}{20pt}} |
492 |
\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{20}{24pt}} |
493 |
\fi |
494 |
|
495 |
|
496 |
% Check if we have selected 10 points |
497 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten |
498 |
\typeout{-- This is a 10 point document.} |
499 |
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10}{11}}% |
500 |
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11pt}% |
501 |
\normalsize |
502 |
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus4pt minus2pt% |
503 |
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% |
504 |
\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus4pt% |
505 |
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus4pt minus2pt |
506 |
\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{9}{10pt}} |
507 |
\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}} |
508 |
\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}} |
509 |
\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}} |
510 |
% sublargesize is a tad smaller than large - 11pt |
511 |
\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{11}{13.4pt}} |
512 |
\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}} |
513 |
\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}} |
514 |
\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}} |
515 |
\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}} |
516 |
\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}} |
517 |
\fi |
518 |
|
519 |
|
520 |
% Check if we have selected 11 points |
521 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven |
522 |
\typeout{-- This is an 11 point document.} |
523 |
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11}{13.3846pt}}% |
524 |
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.3846pt}% |
525 |
\normalsize |
526 |
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus5pt minus3pt% |
527 |
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% |
528 |
\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus5pt% |
529 |
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus5pt minus3pt |
530 |
\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}} |
531 |
\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}} |
532 |
\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}} |
533 |
\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}} |
534 |
% sublargesize is the same as large - 12pt |
535 |
\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{12}{14pt}} |
536 |
\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}} |
537 |
\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}} |
538 |
\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}} |
539 |
\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}} |
540 |
\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}} |
541 |
\fi |
542 |
|
543 |
|
544 |
% Check if we have selected 12 points |
545 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve |
546 |
\typeout{-- This is a 12 point document.} |
547 |
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12}{13.92pt}}% |
548 |
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.92pt}% |
549 |
\normalsize |
550 |
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus6pt minus4pt% |
551 |
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% |
552 |
\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus6pt% |
553 |
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus6pt minus4pt |
554 |
\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}} |
555 |
\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}} |
556 |
\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}} |
557 |
\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}} |
558 |
% sublargesize is the same as large - 14pt |
559 |
\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{14}{17pt}} |
560 |
\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{14}{17pt}} |
561 |
\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{17}{20pt}} |
562 |
\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{20}{24pt}} |
563 |
\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{22}{26pt}} |
564 |
\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}} |
565 |
\fi |
566 |
|
567 |
|
568 |
% V1.6 The Computer Modern Fonts will issue a substitution warning for |
569 |
% 24pt titles (24.88pt is used instead) increase the substitution |
570 |
% tolerance to turn off this warning |
571 |
\def\fontsubfuzz{.9pt} |
572 |
% However, the default (and correct) Times font will scale exactly as needed. |
573 |
|
574 |
|
575 |
% warn the user in case they forget to use the 9pt option with |
576 |
% technote |
577 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% |
578 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\else% |
579 |
\typeout{** ATTENTION: Technotes are normally 9pt documents.}% |
580 |
\fi% |
581 |
\fi |
582 |
|
583 |
|
584 |
% V1.7 |
585 |
% Improved \textunderscore to provide a much better fake _ when used with |
586 |
% OT1 encoding. Under OT1, detect use of pcr or cmtt \ttfamily and use |
587 |
% available true _ glyph for those two typewriter fonts. |
588 |
\def\@IEEEstringptm{ptm} % Times Roman family |
589 |
\def\@IEEEstringppl{ppl} % Palatino Roman family |
590 |
\def\@IEEEstringphv{phv} % Helvetica Sans Serif family |
591 |
\def\@IEEEstringpcr{pcr} % Courier typewriter family |
592 |
\def\@IEEEstringcmtt{cmtt} % Computer Modern typewriter family |
593 |
\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textunderscore}{\leavevmode |
594 |
\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringpcr\string_\else |
595 |
\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringcmtt\string_\else |
596 |
\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringptm\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else |
597 |
\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringppl\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else |
598 |
\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringphv\kern -0.03em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.62em\@height 0.52pt\kern -0.33ex}\kern -0.03em\else |
599 |
\kern 0.09em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.6em\@height 0.44pt\kern -0.63pt\kern -0.42ex}\kern 0.09em\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\relax} |
600 |
|
601 |
|
602 |
|
603 |
|
604 |
% set the default \baselinestretch |
605 |
\def\baselinestretch{1} |
606 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls |
607 |
\def\baselinestretch{1.5}% default baselinestretch for draft modes |
608 |
\fi |
609 |
|
610 |
|
611 |
% process CLASSINPUT baselinestretch |
612 |
\ifx\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch\@IEEEundefined |
613 |
\else |
614 |
\edef\baselinestretch{\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch} % user CLASSINPUT override |
615 |
\typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding \string\baselinestretch\space to |
616 |
\baselinestretch\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.} |
617 |
\fi |
618 |
|
619 |
\normalsize % make \baselinestretch take affect |
620 |
|
621 |
|
622 |
|
623 |
|
624 |
% store the normalsize baselineskip |
625 |
\newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip |
626 |
\CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip=\baselineskip\relax |
627 |
% and the normalsize unity (baselinestretch=1) baselineskip |
628 |
% we could save a register by giving the user access to |
629 |
% \@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip. However, let's protect |
630 |
% its read only internal status |
631 |
\newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip |
632 |
\CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\relax |
633 |
% store the nominal value of jot |
634 |
\newdimen\IEEEnormaljot |
635 |
\IEEEnormaljot=0.25\baselineskip\relax |
636 |
|
637 |
% set \jot |
638 |
\jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax |
639 |
|
640 |
|
641 |
|
642 |
|
643 |
% V1.6, we are now going to fine tune the interword spacing |
644 |
% The default interword glue for Times under TeX appears to use a |
645 |
% nominal interword spacing of 25% (relative to the font size, i.e., 1em) |
646 |
% a maximum of 40% and a minimum of 19%. |
647 |
% For example, 10pt text uses an interword glue of: |
648 |
% |
649 |
% 2.5pt plus 1.49998pt minus 0.59998pt |
650 |
% |
651 |
% However, IEEE allows for a more generous range which reduces the need |
652 |
% for hyphenation, especially for two column text. Furthermore, IEEE |
653 |
% tends to use a little bit more nominal space between the words. |
654 |
% IEEE's interword spacing percentages appear to be: |
655 |
% 35% nominal |
656 |
% 23% minimum |
657 |
% 50% maximum |
658 |
% (They may even be using a tad more for the largest fonts such as 24pt.) |
659 |
% |
660 |
% for bold text, IEEE increases the spacing a little more: |
661 |
% 37.5% nominal |
662 |
% 23% minimum |
663 |
% 55% maximum |
664 |
|
665 |
% here are the interword spacing ratios we'll use |
666 |
% for medium (normal weight) |
667 |
\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioM{0.35} |
668 |
\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM{0.23} |
669 |
\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM{0.50} |
670 |
|
671 |
% for bold |
672 |
\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioB{0.375} |
673 |
\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB{0.23} |
674 |
\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB{0.55} |
675 |
|
676 |
|
677 |
% command to revise the interword spacing for the current font under TeX: |
678 |
% \fontdimen2 = nominal interword space |
679 |
% \fontdimen3 = interword stretch |
680 |
% \fontdimen4 = interword shrink |
681 |
% since all changes to the \fontdimen are global, we can enclose these commands |
682 |
% in braces to confine any font attribute or length changes |
683 |
\def\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens#1#2#3{{% |
684 |
\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\f@size pt}% grab the font size in pt, could use 1em instead. |
685 |
\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% |
686 |
\fontdimen2\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax |
687 |
\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% |
688 |
\fontdimen3\font=-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax |
689 |
\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% |
690 |
\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% |
691 |
\fontdimen4\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax}} |
692 |
|
693 |
% revise the interword spacing for each font weight |
694 |
\def\@@IEEEsetfontdimens{{% |
695 |
\mdseries |
696 |
\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM}% |
697 |
\bfseries |
698 |
\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB}% |
699 |
}} |
700 |
|
701 |
% revise the interword spacing for each font shape |
702 |
% \slshape is not often used for IEEE work and is not altered here. The \scshape caps are |
703 |
% already a tad too large in the free LaTeX fonts (as compared to what IEEE uses) so we |
704 |
% won't alter these either. |
705 |
\def\@IEEEsetfontdimens{{% |
706 |
\normalfont |
707 |
\@@IEEEsetfontdimens |
708 |
\normalfont\itshape |
709 |
\@@IEEEsetfontdimens |
710 |
}} |
711 |
|
712 |
% command to revise the interword spacing for each font size (and shape |
713 |
% and weight). Only the \rmfamily is done here as \ttfamily uses a |
714 |
% fixed spacing and \sffamily is not used as the main text of IEEE papers. |
715 |
\def\@IEEEtunefonts{{\selectfont\rmfamily |
716 |
\tiny\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
717 |
\scriptsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
718 |
\footnotesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
719 |
\small\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
720 |
\normalsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
721 |
\sublargesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
722 |
\large\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
723 |
\LARGE\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
724 |
\huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
725 |
\Huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens}} |
726 |
|
727 |
% if the nofonttune class option is not given, revise the interword spacing |
728 |
% now - in case IEEEtran makes any default length measurements, and make |
729 |
% sure all the default fonts are loaded |
730 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else |
731 |
\@IEEEtunefonts |
732 |
\fi |
733 |
|
734 |
% and again at the start of the document in case the user loaded different fonts |
735 |
\AtBeginDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else\@IEEEtunefonts\fi} |
736 |
|
737 |
|
738 |
|
739 |
% V1.6 |
740 |
% LaTeX is a little to quick to use hyphenations |
741 |
% So, we increase the penalty for their use and raise |
742 |
% the badness level that triggers an underfull hbox |
743 |
% warning. The author may still have to tweak things, |
744 |
% but the appearance will be much better "right out |
745 |
% of the box" than that under V1.5 and prior. |
746 |
% TeX default is 50 |
747 |
\hyphenpenalty=750 |
748 |
% If we didn't adjust the interword spacing, 2200 might be better. |
749 |
% The TeX default is 1000 |
750 |
\hbadness=1350 |
751 |
% IEEE does not use extra spacing after punctuation |
752 |
\frenchspacing |
753 |
|
754 |
% V1.7 increase this a tad to discourage equation breaks |
755 |
\binoppenalty=1000 % default 700 |
756 |
\relpenalty=800 % default 500 |
757 |
|
758 |
|
759 |
% margin note stuff |
760 |
\marginparsep 10pt |
761 |
\marginparwidth 20pt |
762 |
\marginparpush 25pt |
763 |
|
764 |
|
765 |
% if things get too close, go ahead and let them touch |
766 |
\lineskip 0pt |
767 |
\normallineskip 0pt |
768 |
\lineskiplimit 0pt |
769 |
\normallineskiplimit 0pt |
770 |
|
771 |
% The distance from the lower edge of the text body to the |
772 |
% footline |
773 |
\footskip 0.4in |
774 |
|
775 |
% normally zero, should be relative to font height. |
776 |
% put in a little rubber to help stop some bad breaks (underfull vboxes) |
777 |
\parskip 0ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.1ex |
778 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
779 |
\parskip 6pt plus 2pt minus 1pt |
780 |
\fi |
781 |
|
782 |
\parindent 1.0em |
783 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
784 |
\parindent 14.45pt |
785 |
\fi |
786 |
|
787 |
\topmargin -49.0pt |
788 |
\headheight 12pt |
789 |
\headsep 0.25in |
790 |
|
791 |
% use the normal font baselineskip |
792 |
% so that \topskip is unaffected by changes in \baselinestretch |
793 |
\topskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip |
794 |
\textheight 58pc % 9.63in, 696pt |
795 |
% Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page. |
796 |
% The normal baselineskip for each document point size is used |
797 |
% to determine these values. |
798 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=63\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 63 lines/page |
799 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=58\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 58 lines/page |
800 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=52\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 52 lines/page |
801 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=50\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 50 lines/page |
802 |
|
803 |
|
804 |
\columnsep 1.5pc |
805 |
\textwidth 184.2mm |
806 |
|
807 |
|
808 |
% the default side margins are equal |
809 |
\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper |
810 |
\oddsidemargin 14.32mm |
811 |
\evensidemargin 14.32mm |
812 |
\else |
813 |
\oddsidemargin 0.680in |
814 |
\evensidemargin 0.680in |
815 |
\fi |
816 |
% compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset |
817 |
\addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in} |
818 |
\addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in} |
819 |
|
820 |
|
821 |
|
822 |
% adjust margins for conference mode |
823 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
824 |
\topmargin -0.25in |
825 |
% we retain the reserved, but unused space for headers |
826 |
\addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight} |
827 |
\addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep} |
828 |
\textheight 9.25in % The standard for conferences (668.4975pt) |
829 |
% Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page. |
830 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=61\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 61 lines/page |
831 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=62\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 62 lines/page |
832 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=50\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 50 lines/page |
833 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=48\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 48 lines/page |
834 |
\fi |
835 |
|
836 |
|
837 |
% compsoc conference |
838 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
839 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
840 |
% compsoc conference use a larger value for columnsep |
841 |
\columnsep 0.375in |
842 |
% compsoc conferences want 1in top margin, 1.125in bottom margin |
843 |
\topmargin 0in |
844 |
\addtolength{\topmargin}{-6pt}% we tweak this a tad to better comply with top of line stuff |
845 |
% we retain the reserved, but unused space for headers |
846 |
\addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight} |
847 |
\addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep} |
848 |
\textheight 8.875in % (641.39625pt) |
849 |
% Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page. |
850 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=58\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 58 lines/page |
851 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=53\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 53 lines/page |
852 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=48\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 48 lines/page |
853 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=46\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 46 lines/page |
854 |
\textwidth 6.5in |
855 |
% the default side margins are equal |
856 |
\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper |
857 |
\oddsidemargin 22.45mm |
858 |
\evensidemargin 22.45mm |
859 |
\else |
860 |
\oddsidemargin 1in |
861 |
\evensidemargin 1in |
862 |
\fi |
863 |
% compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset |
864 |
\addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in} |
865 |
\addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in} |
866 |
\fi\fi |
867 |
|
868 |
|
869 |
|
870 |
% draft mode settings override that of all other modes |
871 |
% provides a nice 1in margin all around the paper and extra |
872 |
% space between the lines for editor's comments |
873 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls |
874 |
% want 1in from top of paper to text |
875 |
\setlength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}% |
876 |
\addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}% |
877 |
% we want 1in side margins regardless of paper type |
878 |
\oddsidemargin 0in |
879 |
\evensidemargin 0in |
880 |
% set the text width |
881 |
\setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth}% |
882 |
\addtolength{\textwidth}{-2.0in}% |
883 |
\setlength{\textheight}{\paperheight}% |
884 |
\addtolength{\textheight}{-2.0in}% |
885 |
% digitize textheight to be an integer number of lines. |
886 |
% this may cause the bottom margin to be off a tad |
887 |
\addtolength{\textheight}{-1\topskip}% |
888 |
\divide\textheight by \baselineskip% |
889 |
\multiply\textheight by \baselineskip% |
890 |
\addtolength{\textheight}{\topskip}% |
891 |
\fi |
892 |
|
893 |
|
894 |
|
895 |
% process CLASSINPUT inner/outer margin |
896 |
% if inner margin defined, but outer margin not, set outer to inner. |
897 |
\ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined |
898 |
\else |
899 |
\ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined |
900 |
\edef\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} |
901 |
\fi |
902 |
\fi |
903 |
|
904 |
\ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined |
905 |
\else |
906 |
% if outer margin defined, but inner margin not, set inner to outer. |
907 |
\ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined |
908 |
\edef\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin} |
909 |
\fi |
910 |
\setlength{\oddsidemargin}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} |
911 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside |
912 |
\setlength{\evensidemargin}{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin} |
913 |
\else |
914 |
\setlength{\evensidemargin}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} |
915 |
\fi |
916 |
\addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in} |
917 |
\addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in} |
918 |
\setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth} |
919 |
\addtolength{\textwidth}{-\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} |
920 |
\addtolength{\textwidth}{-\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin} |
921 |
\typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding inner side margin to \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\space and |
922 |
outer side margin to \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.} |
923 |
\fi |
924 |
|
925 |
|
926 |
|
927 |
% process CLASSINPUT top/bottom text margin |
928 |
% if toptext margin defined, but bottomtext margin not, set bottomtext to toptext margin |
929 |
\ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined |
930 |
\else |
931 |
\ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined |
932 |
\edef\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin} |
933 |
\fi |
934 |
\fi |
935 |
|
936 |
\ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined |
937 |
\else |
938 |
% if bottomtext margin defined, but toptext margin not, set toptext to bottomtext margin |
939 |
\ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined |
940 |
\edef\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin{\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin} |
941 |
\fi |
942 |
\setlength{\topmargin}{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin} |
943 |
\addtolength{\topmargin}{-1in} |
944 |
\addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight} |
945 |
\addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep} |
946 |
\setlength{\textheight}{\paperheight} |
947 |
\addtolength{\textheight}{-\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin} |
948 |
\addtolength{\textheight}{-\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin} |
949 |
% in the default format we use the normal baselineskip as topskip |
950 |
% we only need 0.7 of this to clear typical top text and we need |
951 |
% an extra 0.3 spacing at the bottom for descenders. This will |
952 |
% correct for both. |
953 |
\addtolength{\topmargin}{-0.3\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip} |
954 |
\typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding top text margin to \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\space and |
955 |
bottom text margin to \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.} |
956 |
\fi |
957 |
|
958 |
|
959 |
|
960 |
|
961 |
|
962 |
|
963 |
|
964 |
% LIST SPACING CONTROLS |
965 |
|
966 |
% Controls the amount of EXTRA spacing |
967 |
% above and below \trivlist |
968 |
% Both \list and IED lists override this. |
969 |
% However, \trivlist will use this as will most |
970 |
% things built from \trivlist like the \center |
971 |
% environment. |
972 |
\topsep 0.5\baselineskip |
973 |
|
974 |
% Controls the additional spacing around lists preceded |
975 |
% or followed by blank lines. IEEE does not increase |
976 |
% spacing before or after paragraphs so it is set to zero. |
977 |
% \z@ is the same as zero, but faster. |
978 |
\partopsep \z@ |
979 |
|
980 |
% Controls the spacing between paragraphs in lists. |
981 |
% IEEE does not increase spacing before or after paragraphs |
982 |
% so this is also zero. |
983 |
% With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to |
984 |
% this value DO affect lists (but not IED lists). |
985 |
\parsep \z@ |
986 |
|
987 |
% Controls the extra spacing between list items. |
988 |
% IEEE does not put extra spacing between items. |
989 |
% With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to this value DO affect |
990 |
% lists (but not IED lists). |
991 |
\itemsep \z@ |
992 |
|
993 |
% \itemindent is the amount to indent the FIRST line of a list |
994 |
% item. It is auto set to zero within the \list environment. To alter |
995 |
% it, you have to do so when you call the \list. |
996 |
% However, IEEE uses this for the theorem environment |
997 |
% There is an alternative value for this near \leftmargini below |
998 |
\itemindent -1em |
999 |
|
1000 |
% \leftmargin, the spacing from the left margin of the main text to |
1001 |
% the left of the main body of a list item is set by \list. |
1002 |
% Hence this statement does nothing for lists. |
1003 |
% But, quote and verse do use it for indention. |
1004 |
\leftmargin 2em |
1005 |
|
1006 |
% we retain this stuff from the older IEEEtran.cls so that \list |
1007 |
% will work the same way as before. However, itemize, enumerate and |
1008 |
% description (IED) could care less about what these are as they |
1009 |
% all are overridden. |
1010 |
\leftmargini 2em |
1011 |
%\itemindent 2em % Alternative values: sometimes used. |
1012 |
%\leftmargini 0em |
1013 |
\leftmarginii 1em |
1014 |
\leftmarginiii 1.5em |
1015 |
\leftmarginiv 1.5em |
1016 |
\leftmarginv 1.0em |
1017 |
\leftmarginvi 1.0em |
1018 |
\labelsep 0.5em |
1019 |
\labelwidth \z@ |
1020 |
|
1021 |
|
1022 |
% The old IEEEtran.cls behavior of \list is retained. |
1023 |
% However, the new V1.3 IED list environments override all the |
1024 |
% @list stuff (\@listX is called within \list for the |
1025 |
% appropriate level just before the user's list_decl is called). |
1026 |
% \topsep is now 2pt as IEEE puts a little extra space around |
1027 |
% lists - used by those non-IED macros that depend on \list. |
1028 |
% Note that \parsep and \itemsep are not redefined as in |
1029 |
% the sizexx.clo \@listX (which article.cls uses) so global changes |
1030 |
% of these values DO affect \list |
1031 |
% |
1032 |
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini \topsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt} |
1033 |
\let\@listI\@listi |
1034 |
\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii\labelwidth\leftmarginii% |
1035 |
\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} |
1036 |
\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii\labelwidth\leftmarginiii% |
1037 |
\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} |
1038 |
\def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv\labelwidth\leftmarginiv% |
1039 |
\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} |
1040 |
\def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv\labelwidth\leftmarginv% |
1041 |
\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} |
1042 |
\def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi\labelwidth\leftmarginvi% |
1043 |
\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} |
1044 |
|
1045 |
|
1046 |
% IEEE uses 5) not 5. |
1047 |
\def\labelenumi{\theenumi)} \def\theenumi{\arabic{enumi}} |
1048 |
|
1049 |
% IEEE uses a) not (a) |
1050 |
\def\labelenumii{\theenumii)} \def\theenumii{\alph{enumii}} |
1051 |
|
1052 |
% IEEE uses iii) not iii. |
1053 |
\def\labelenumiii{\theenumiii)} \def\theenumiii{\roman{enumiii}} |
1054 |
|
1055 |
% IEEE uses A) not A. |
1056 |
\def\labelenumiv{\theenumiv)} \def\theenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}} |
1057 |
|
1058 |
% exactly the same as in article.cls |
1059 |
\def\p@enumii{\theenumi} |
1060 |
\def\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)} |
1061 |
\def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii} |
1062 |
|
1063 |
% itemized list label styles |
1064 |
\def\labelitemi{$\bullet$} |
1065 |
\def\labelitemii{$\circ$} |
1066 |
\def\labelitemiii{\vrule height 0.8ex depth -0.2ex width 0.6ex} |
1067 |
\def\labelitemiv{$\ast$} |
1068 |
|
1069 |
|
1070 |
|
1071 |
% **** V1.3 ENHANCEMENTS **** |
1072 |
% Itemize, Enumerate and Description (IED) List Controls |
1073 |
% *************************** |
1074 |
% |
1075 |
% |
1076 |
% IEEE seems to use at least two different values by |
1077 |
% which ITEMIZED list labels are indented to the right |
1078 |
% For The Journal of Lightwave Technology (JLT) and The Journal |
1079 |
% on Selected Areas in Communications (JSAC), they tend to use |
1080 |
% an indention equal to \parindent. For Transactions on Communications |
1081 |
% they tend to indent ITEMIZED lists a little more--- 1.3\parindent. |
1082 |
% We'll provide both values here for you so that you can choose |
1083 |
% which one you like in your document using a command such as: |
1084 |
% setlength{\IEEEilabelindent}{\IEEEilabelindentB} |
1085 |
\newdimen\IEEEilabelindentA |
1086 |
\IEEEilabelindentA \parindent |
1087 |
|
1088 |
\newdimen\IEEEilabelindentB |
1089 |
\IEEEilabelindentB 1.3\parindent |
1090 |
% However, we'll default to using \parindent |
1091 |
% which makes more sense to me |
1092 |
\newdimen\IEEEilabelindent |
1093 |
\IEEEilabelindent \IEEEilabelindentA |
1094 |
|
1095 |
|
1096 |
% This controls the default amount the enumerated list labels |
1097 |
% are indented to the right. |
1098 |
% Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention |
1099 |
\newdimen\IEEEelabelindent |
1100 |
\IEEEelabelindent \parindent |
1101 |
|
1102 |
% This controls the default amount the description list labels |
1103 |
% are indented to the right. |
1104 |
% Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention |
1105 |
\newdimen\IEEEdlabelindent |
1106 |
\IEEEdlabelindent \parindent |
1107 |
|
1108 |
% This is the value actually used within the IED lists. |
1109 |
% The IED environments automatically set its value to |
1110 |
% one of the three values above, so global changes do |
1111 |
% not have any effect |
1112 |
\newdimen\IEEElabelindent |
1113 |
\IEEElabelindent \parindent |
1114 |
|
1115 |
% The actual amount labels will be indented is |
1116 |
% \IEEElabelindent multiplied by the factor below |
1117 |
% corresponding to the level of nesting depth |
1118 |
% This provides a means by which the user can |
1119 |
% alter the effective \IEEElabelindent for deeper |
1120 |
% levels |
1121 |
% There may not be such a thing as correct "standard IEEE" |
1122 |
% values. What IEEE actually does may depend on the specific |
1123 |
% circumstances. |
1124 |
% The first list level almost always has full indention. |
1125 |
% The second levels I've seen have only 75% of the normal indentation |
1126 |
% Three level or greater nestings are very rare. I am guessing |
1127 |
% that they don't use any indentation. |
1128 |
\def\IEEElabelindentfactori{1.0} % almost always one |
1129 |
\def\IEEElabelindentfactorii{0.75} % 0.0 or 1.0 may be used in some cases |
1130 |
\def\IEEElabelindentfactoriii{0.0} % 0.75? 0.5? 0.0? |
1131 |
\def\IEEElabelindentfactoriv{0.0} |
1132 |
\def\IEEElabelindentfactorv{0.0} |
1133 |
\def\IEEElabelindentfactorvi{0.0} |
1134 |
|
1135 |
% value actually used within IED lists, it is auto |
1136 |
% set to one of the 6 values above |
1137 |
% global changes here have no effect |
1138 |
\def\IEEElabelindentfactor{1.0} |
1139 |
|
1140 |
% This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED |
1141 |
% list labels and the list text, when normal text is used for |
1142 |
% the labels. |
1143 |
\newdimen\IEEEiednormlabelsep |
1144 |
\IEEEiednormlabelsep \parindent |
1145 |
|
1146 |
% This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED |
1147 |
% list labels and the list text, when math symbols are used for |
1148 |
% the labels (nomenclature lists). IEEE usually increases the |
1149 |
% spacing in these cases |
1150 |
\newdimen\IEEEiedmathlabelsep |
1151 |
\IEEEiedmathlabelsep 1.2em |
1152 |
|
1153 |
% This controls the extra vertical separation put above and |
1154 |
% below each IED list. IEEE usually puts a little extra spacing |
1155 |
% around each list. However, this spacing is barely noticeable. |
1156 |
\newskip\IEEEiedtopsep |
1157 |
\IEEEiedtopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt |
1158 |
|
1159 |
|
1160 |
% This command is executed within each IED list environment |
1161 |
% at the beginning of the list. You can use this to set the |
1162 |
% parameters for some/all your IED list(s) without disturbing |
1163 |
% global parameters that affect things other than lists. |
1164 |
% i.e., renewcommand{\IEEEiedlistdecl}{\setlength{\labelsep}{5em}} |
1165 |
% will alter the \labelsep for the next list(s) until |
1166 |
% \IEEEiedlistdecl is redefined. |
1167 |
\def\IEEEiedlistdecl{\relax} |
1168 |
|
1169 |
% This command provides an easy way to set \leftmargin based |
1170 |
% on the \labelwidth, \labelsep and the argument \IEEElabelindent |
1171 |
% Usage: \IEEEcalcleftmargin{width-to-indent-the-label} |
1172 |
% output is in the \leftmargin variable, i.e., effectively: |
1173 |
% \leftmargin = argument + \labelwidth + \labelsep |
1174 |
% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % |
1175 |
\def\IEEEcalcleftmargin#1{\setlength{\leftmargin}{#1}% |
1176 |
\addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}% |
1177 |
\addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}} |
1178 |
|
1179 |
% This command provides an easy way to set \labelwidth to the |
1180 |
% width of the given text. It is the same as |
1181 |
% \settowidth{\labelwidth}{label-text} |
1182 |
% and useful as a shorter alternative. |
1183 |
% Typically used to set \labelwidth to be the width |
1184 |
% of the longest label in the list |
1185 |
\def\IEEEsetlabelwidth#1{\settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1}} |
1186 |
|
1187 |
% When this command is executed, IED lists will use the |
1188 |
% IEEEiedmathlabelsep label separation rather than the normal |
1189 |
% spacing. To have an effect, this command must be executed via |
1190 |
% the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list |
1191 |
% environments. |
1192 |
\def\IEEEusemathlabelsep{\setlength{\labelsep}{\IEEEiedmathlabelsep}} |
1193 |
|
1194 |
% A flag which controls whether the IED lists automatically |
1195 |
% calculate \leftmargin from \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and \labelsep |
1196 |
% Useful if you want to specify your own \leftmargin |
1197 |
% This flag must be set (\IEEEnocalcleftmargintrue or \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse) |
1198 |
% via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list |
1199 |
% environments to have an effect. |
1200 |
\newif\ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin |
1201 |
\IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse |
1202 |
|
1203 |
% A flag which controls whether \IEEElabelindent is multiplied by |
1204 |
% the \IEEElabelindentfactor for each list level. |
1205 |
% This flag must be set via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option |
1206 |
% of the IED list environments to have an effect. |
1207 |
\newif\ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor |
1208 |
\IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse |
1209 |
|
1210 |
|
1211 |
% internal variable to indicate type of IED label |
1212 |
% justification |
1213 |
% 0 - left; 1 - center; 2 - right |
1214 |
\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0} |
1215 |
|
1216 |
|
1217 |
% commands to allow the user to control IED |
1218 |
% label justifications. Use these commands within |
1219 |
% the IED environment option or in the \IEEEiedlistdecl |
1220 |
% Note that changing the normal list justifications |
1221 |
% is nonstandard and IEEE may not like it if you do so! |
1222 |
% I include these commands as they may be helpful to |
1223 |
% those who are using these enhanced list controls for |
1224 |
% other non-IEEE related LaTeX work. |
1225 |
% itemize and enumerate automatically default to right |
1226 |
% justification, description defaults to left. |
1227 |
\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}}%left |
1228 |
\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{1}}%center |
1229 |
\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}}%right |
1230 |
|
1231 |
|
1232 |
|
1233 |
|
1234 |
% commands to save to and restore from the list parameter copies |
1235 |
% this allows us to set all the list parameters within |
1236 |
% the list_decl and prevent \list (and its \@list) |
1237 |
% from overriding any of our parameters |
1238 |
% V1.6 use \edefs instead of dimen's to conserve dimen registers |
1239 |
% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % |
1240 |
\def\@IEEEsavelistparams{\edef\@IEEEiedtopsep{\the\topsep}% |
1241 |
\edef\@IEEEiedlabelwidth{\the\labelwidth}% |
1242 |
\edef\@IEEEiedlabelsep{\the\labelsep}% |
1243 |
\edef\@IEEEiedleftmargin{\the\leftmargin}% |
1244 |
\edef\@IEEEiedpartopsep{\the\partopsep}% |
1245 |
\edef\@IEEEiedparsep{\the\parsep}% |
1246 |
\edef\@IEEEieditemsep{\the\itemsep}% |
1247 |
\edef\@IEEEiedrightmargin{\the\rightmargin}% |
1248 |
\edef\@IEEEiedlistparindent{\the\listparindent}% |
1249 |
\edef\@IEEEieditemindent{\the\itemindent}} |
1250 |
|
1251 |
% Note controlled spacing here |
1252 |
\def\@IEEErestorelistparams{\topsep\@IEEEiedtopsep\relax% |
1253 |
\labelwidth\@IEEEiedlabelwidth\relax% |
1254 |
\labelsep\@IEEEiedlabelsep\relax% |
1255 |
\leftmargin\@IEEEiedleftmargin\relax% |
1256 |
\partopsep\@IEEEiedpartopsep\relax% |
1257 |
\parsep\@IEEEiedparsep\relax% |
1258 |
\itemsep\@IEEEieditemsep\relax% |
1259 |
\rightmargin\@IEEEiedrightmargin\relax% |
1260 |
\listparindent\@IEEEiedlistparindent\relax% |
1261 |
\itemindent\@IEEEieditemindent\relax} |
1262 |
|
1263 |
|
1264 |
% v1.6b provide original LaTeX IED list environments |
1265 |
% note that latex.ltx defines \itemize and \enumerate, but not \description |
1266 |
% which must be created by the base classes |
1267 |
% save original LaTeX itemize and enumerate |
1268 |
\let\LaTeXitemize\itemize |
1269 |
\let\endLaTeXitemize\enditemize |
1270 |
\let\LaTeXenumerate\enumerate |
1271 |
\let\endLaTeXenumerate\endenumerate |
1272 |
|
1273 |
% provide original LaTeX description environment from article.cls |
1274 |
\newenvironment{LaTeXdescription} |
1275 |
{\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin |
1276 |
\let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}} |
1277 |
{\endlist} |
1278 |
\newcommand*\descriptionlabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep |
1279 |
\normalfont\bfseries #1} |
1280 |
|
1281 |
|
1282 |
% override LaTeX's default IED lists |
1283 |
\def\itemize{\@IEEEitemize} |
1284 |
\def\enditemize{\@endIEEEitemize} |
1285 |
\def\enumerate{\@IEEEenumerate} |
1286 |
\def\endenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate} |
1287 |
\def\description{\@IEEEdescription} |
1288 |
\def\enddescription{\@endIEEEdescription} |
1289 |
|
1290 |
% provide the user with aliases - may help those using packages that |
1291 |
% override itemize, enumerate, or description |
1292 |
\def\IEEEitemize{\@IEEEitemize} |
1293 |
\def\endIEEEitemize{\@endIEEEitemize} |
1294 |
\def\IEEEenumerate{\@IEEEenumerate} |
1295 |
\def\endIEEEenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate} |
1296 |
\def\IEEEdescription{\@IEEEdescription} |
1297 |
\def\endIEEEdescription{\@endIEEEdescription} |
1298 |
|
1299 |
|
1300 |
% V1.6 we want to keep the IEEEtran IED list definitions as our own internal |
1301 |
% commands so they are protected against redefinition |
1302 |
\def\@IEEEitemize{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEitemize}{\@@IEEEitemize[\relax]}} |
1303 |
\def\@IEEEenumerate{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEenumerate}{\@@IEEEenumerate[\relax]}} |
1304 |
\def\@IEEEdescription{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEdescription}{\@@IEEEdescription[\relax]}} |
1305 |
\def\@endIEEEitemize{\endlist} |
1306 |
\def\@endIEEEenumerate{\endlist} |
1307 |
\def\@endIEEEdescription{\endlist} |
1308 |
|
1309 |
|
1310 |
% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS |
1311 |
% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS |
1312 |
% IEEEtran itemized list MDS 1/2001 |
1313 |
% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % |
1314 |
\def\@@IEEEitemize[#1]{% |
1315 |
\ifnum\@itemdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else% |
1316 |
\ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else% |
1317 |
\advance\@itemdepth\@ne% |
1318 |
\edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}% |
1319 |
% get the labelindentfactor for this level |
1320 |
\advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be |
1321 |
\edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}% |
1322 |
\advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment |
1323 |
\def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default |
1324 |
% set other defaults |
1325 |
\IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse% |
1326 |
\IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse% |
1327 |
\topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% |
1328 |
\IEEElabelindent\IEEEilabelindent% |
1329 |
\labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep% |
1330 |
\partopsep 0ex% |
1331 |
\parsep 0ex% |
1332 |
\itemsep \parskip% |
1333 |
\rightmargin 0em% |
1334 |
\listparindent 0em% |
1335 |
\itemindent 0em% |
1336 |
% calculate the label width |
1337 |
% the user can override this later if |
1338 |
% they specified a \labelwidth |
1339 |
\settowidth{\labelwidth}{\csname labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth\endcsname}% |
1340 |
\@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters |
1341 |
\list{\csname\@itemitem\endcsname}{% |
1342 |
\@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes |
1343 |
% to our globals |
1344 |
\let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel |
1345 |
\IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters |
1346 |
#1\relax% |
1347 |
% If the user has requested not to use the |
1348 |
% labelindent factor, don't revise \labelindent |
1349 |
\ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax% |
1350 |
\else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\labelindent% |
1351 |
\fi% |
1352 |
% Unless the user has requested otherwise, |
1353 |
% calculate our left margin based |
1354 |
% on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and |
1355 |
% \labelsep |
1356 |
\ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax% |
1357 |
\else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}% |
1358 |
\fi}\fi\fi}% |
1359 |
|
1360 |
|
1361 |
% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS |
1362 |
% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS |
1363 |
% IEEEtran enumerate list MDS 1/2001 |
1364 |
% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % |
1365 |
\def\@@IEEEenumerate[#1]{% |
1366 |
\ifnum\@enumdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else% |
1367 |
\ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else% |
1368 |
\advance\@enumdepth\@ne% |
1369 |
\edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}% |
1370 |
% get the labelindentfactor for this level |
1371 |
\advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be |
1372 |
\edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}% |
1373 |
\advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment |
1374 |
\def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default |
1375 |
% set other defaults |
1376 |
\IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse% |
1377 |
\IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse% |
1378 |
\topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% |
1379 |
\IEEElabelindent\IEEEelabelindent% |
1380 |
\labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep% |
1381 |
\partopsep 0ex% |
1382 |
\parsep 0ex% |
1383 |
\itemsep 0ex% |
1384 |
\rightmargin 0em% |
1385 |
\listparindent 0em% |
1386 |
\itemindent 0em% |
1387 |
% calculate the label width |
1388 |
% We'll set it to the width suitable for all labels using |
1389 |
% normalfont 1) to 9) |
1390 |
% The user can override this later |
1391 |
\settowidth{\labelwidth}{9)}% |
1392 |
\@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters |
1393 |
\list{\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname}{\usecounter{\@enumctr}% |
1394 |
\@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes |
1395 |
% to our globals |
1396 |
\let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel |
1397 |
\IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters |
1398 |
#1\relax% |
1399 |
% If the user has requested not to use the |
1400 |
% IEEElabelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent |
1401 |
\ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax% |
1402 |
\else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent% |
1403 |
\fi% |
1404 |
% Unless the user has requested otherwise, |
1405 |
% calculate our left margin based |
1406 |
% on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and |
1407 |
% \labelsep |
1408 |
\ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax% |
1409 |
\else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}% |
1410 |
\fi}\fi\fi}% |
1411 |
|
1412 |
|
1413 |
% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS |
1414 |
% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS |
1415 |
% IEEEtran description list MDS 1/2001 |
1416 |
% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % |
1417 |
\def\@@IEEEdescription[#1]{% |
1418 |
\ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else% |
1419 |
% get the labelindentfactor for this level |
1420 |
\advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be |
1421 |
\edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}% |
1422 |
\advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment |
1423 |
\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}% left justified labels are default |
1424 |
% set other defaults |
1425 |
\IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse% |
1426 |
\IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse% |
1427 |
\topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% |
1428 |
\IEEElabelindent\IEEEdlabelindent% |
1429 |
% assume normal labelsep |
1430 |
\labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep% |
1431 |
\partopsep 0ex% |
1432 |
\parsep 0ex% |
1433 |
\itemsep 0ex% |
1434 |
\rightmargin 0em% |
1435 |
\listparindent 0em% |
1436 |
\itemindent 0em% |
1437 |
% Bogus label width in case the user forgets |
1438 |
% to set it. |
1439 |
% TIP: If you want to see what a variable's width is you |
1440 |
% can use the TeX command \showthe\width-variable to |
1441 |
% display it on the screen during compilation |
1442 |
% (This might be helpful to know when you need to find out |
1443 |
% which label is the widest) |
1444 |
\settowidth{\labelwidth}{Hello}% |
1445 |
\@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters |
1446 |
\list{}{\@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes |
1447 |
% to our globals |
1448 |
\let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel |
1449 |
\IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters |
1450 |
#1\relax% |
1451 |
% If the user has requested not to use the |
1452 |
% labelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent |
1453 |
\ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax% |
1454 |
\else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent% |
1455 |
\fi% |
1456 |
% Unless the user has requested otherwise, |
1457 |
% calculate our left margin based |
1458 |
% on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and |
1459 |
% \labelsep |
1460 |
\ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax% |
1461 |
\else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}\relax% |
1462 |
\fi}\fi} |
1463 |
|
1464 |
% v1.6b we use one makelabel that does justification as needed. |
1465 |
\def\@IEEEiedmakelabel#1{\relax\if\@IEEEiedjustify 0\relax |
1466 |
\makebox[\labelwidth][l]{\normalfont #1}\else |
1467 |
\if\@IEEEiedjustify 1\relax |
1468 |
\makebox[\labelwidth][c]{\normalfont #1}\else |
1469 |
\makebox[\labelwidth][r]{\normalfont #1}\fi\fi} |
1470 |
|
1471 |
|
1472 |
% VERSE and QUOTE |
1473 |
% V1.7 define environments with newenvironment |
1474 |
\newenvironment{verse}{\let\\=\@centercr |
1475 |
\list{}{\itemsep\z@ \itemindent -1.5em \listparindent \itemindent |
1476 |
\rightmargin\leftmargin\advance\leftmargin 1.5em}\item\relax} |
1477 |
{\endlist} |
1478 |
\newenvironment{quotation}{\list{}{\listparindent 1.5em \itemindent\listparindent |
1479 |
\rightmargin\leftmargin \parsep 0pt plus 1pt}\item\relax} |
1480 |
{\endlist} |
1481 |
\newenvironment{quote}{\list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}\item\relax} |
1482 |
{\endlist} |
1483 |
|
1484 |
|
1485 |
% \titlepage |
1486 |
% provided only for backward compatibility. \maketitle is the correct |
1487 |
% way to create the title page. |
1488 |
\newif\if@restonecol |
1489 |
\def\titlepage{\@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn |
1490 |
\else \newpage \fi \thispagestyle{empty}\c@page\z@} |
1491 |
\def\endtitlepage{\if@restonecol\twocolumn \else \newpage \fi} |
1492 |
|
1493 |
% standard values from article.cls |
1494 |
\arraycolsep 5pt |
1495 |
\arrayrulewidth .4pt |
1496 |
\doublerulesep 2pt |
1497 |
|
1498 |
\tabcolsep 6pt |
1499 |
\tabbingsep 0.5em |
1500 |
|
1501 |
|
1502 |
%% FOOTNOTES |
1503 |
% |
1504 |
%\skip\footins 10pt plus 4pt minus 2pt |
1505 |
% V1.6 respond to changes in font size |
1506 |
% space added above the footnotes (if present) |
1507 |
\skip\footins 0.9\baselineskip plus 0.4\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip |
1508 |
|
1509 |
% V1.6, we need to make \footnotesep responsive to changes |
1510 |
% in \baselineskip or strange spacings will result when in |
1511 |
% draft mode. Here is a little LaTeX secret - \footnotesep |
1512 |
% determines the height of an invisible strut that is placed |
1513 |
% *above* the baseline of footnotes after the first. Since |
1514 |
% LaTeX considers the space for characters to be 0.7/baselineskip |
1515 |
% above the baseline and 0.3/baselineskip below it, we need to |
1516 |
% use 0.7/baselineskip as a \footnotesep to maintain equal spacing |
1517 |
% between all the lines of the footnotes. IEEE often uses a tad |
1518 |
% more, so use 0.8\baselineskip. This slightly larger value also helps |
1519 |
% the text to clear the footnote marks. Note that \thanks in IEEEtran |
1520 |
% uses its own value of \footnotesep which is set in \maketitle. |
1521 |
{\footnotesize |
1522 |
\global\footnotesep 0.8\baselineskip} |
1523 |
|
1524 |
\def\unnumberedfootnote{\gdef\@thefnmark{\quad}\@footnotetext} |
1525 |
|
1526 |
\skip\@mpfootins 0.3\baselineskip |
1527 |
\fboxsep = 3pt |
1528 |
\fboxrule = .4pt |
1529 |
% V1.6 use 1em, then use LaTeX2e's \@makefnmark |
1530 |
% Note that IEEE normally *left* aligns the footnote marks, so we don't need |
1531 |
% box resizing tricks here. |
1532 |
%\long\def\@makefnmark{\scriptsize\normalfont\@thefnmark} |
1533 |
\long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@makefnmark}#1}% V1.6 use 1em |
1534 |
\long\def\@maketablefntext#1{\raggedleft\leavevmode\hbox{\@makefnmark}#1} |
1535 |
% V1.7 compsoc does not use superscipts for footnote marks |
1536 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
1537 |
\def\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark{\hbox{\normalfont\@thefnmark.\ }} |
1538 |
\long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark}#1} |
1539 |
\fi |
1540 |
|
1541 |
% IEEE does not use footnote rules. Or do they? |
1542 |
\def\footnoterule{\vskip-2pt \hrule height 0.6pt depth \z@ \vskip1.6pt\relax} |
1543 |
\toks@\expandafter{\@setminipage\let\footnoterule\relax\footnotesep\z@} |
1544 |
\edef\@setminipage{\the\toks@} |
1545 |
|
1546 |
% V1.7 for compsoc, IEEE uses a footnote rule only for \thanks. We devise a "one-shot" |
1547 |
% system to implement this. |
1548 |
\newif\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule |
1549 |
\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse |
1550 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
1551 |
\def\footnoterule{\relax\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule |
1552 |
\kern-5pt |
1553 |
\hbox to \columnwidth{\hfill\vrule width 0.5\columnwidth height 0.4pt\hfill} |
1554 |
\kern4.6pt |
1555 |
\global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse |
1556 |
\else |
1557 |
\relax |
1558 |
\fi} |
1559 |
\fi |
1560 |
|
1561 |
% V1.6 do not allow LaTeX to break a footnote across multiple pages |
1562 |
\interfootnotelinepenalty=10000 |
1563 |
|
1564 |
% V1.6 discourage breaks within equations |
1565 |
% Note that amsmath normally sets this to 10000, |
1566 |
% but LaTeX2e normally uses 100. |
1567 |
\interdisplaylinepenalty=2500 |
1568 |
|
1569 |
% default allows section depth up to /paragraph |
1570 |
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{4} |
1571 |
|
1572 |
% technotes do not allow /paragraph |
1573 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote |
1574 |
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3} |
1575 |
\fi |
1576 |
% neither do compsoc conferences |
1577 |
\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}} |
1578 |
|
1579 |
|
1580 |
\newcounter{section} |
1581 |
\newcounter{subsection}[section] |
1582 |
\newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection] |
1583 |
\newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection] |
1584 |
|
1585 |
% used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray as other packages may |
1586 |
% have their own, different, implementations |
1587 |
\newcounter{IEEEsubequation}[equation] |
1588 |
|
1589 |
% as shown when called by user from \ref, \label and in table of contents |
1590 |
\def\theequation{\arabic{equation}} % 1 |
1591 |
\def\theIEEEsubequation{\theequation\alph{IEEEsubequation}} % 1a (used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray) |
1592 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
1593 |
% compsoc is all arabic |
1594 |
\def\thesection{\arabic{section}} |
1595 |
\def\thesubsection{\thesection.\arabic{subsection}} |
1596 |
\def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}} |
1597 |
\def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}} |
1598 |
\else |
1599 |
\def\thesection{\Roman{section}} % I |
1600 |
% V1.7, \mbox prevents breaks around - |
1601 |
\def\thesubsection{\mbox{\thesection-\Alph{subsection}}} % I-A |
1602 |
% V1.7 use I-A1 format used by IEEE rather than I-A.1 |
1603 |
\def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection\arabic{subsubsection}} % I-A1 |
1604 |
\def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection\alph{paragraph}} % I-A1a |
1605 |
\fi |
1606 |
|
1607 |
% From Heiko Oberdiek. Because of the \mbox in \thesubsection, we need to |
1608 |
% tell hyperref to disable the \mbox command when making PDF bookmarks. |
1609 |
% This done already with hyperref.sty version 6.74o and later, but |
1610 |
% it will not hurt to do it here again for users of older versions. |
1611 |
\@ifundefined{pdfstringdefPreHook}{\let\pdfstringdefPreHook\@empty}{}% |
1612 |
\g@addto@macro\pdfstringdefPreHook{\let\mbox\relax} |
1613 |
|
1614 |
|
1615 |
% Main text forms (how shown in main text headings) |
1616 |
% V1.6, using \thesection in \thesectiondis allows changes |
1617 |
% in the former to automatically appear in the latter |
1618 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
1619 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference |
1620 |
\def\thesectiondis{\thesection.} |
1621 |
\def\thesubsectiondis{\thesectiondis\arabic{subsection}.} |
1622 |
\def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis\arabic{subsubsection}.} |
1623 |
\def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis\arabic{paragraph}.} |
1624 |
\else% compsoc not conferencs |
1625 |
\def\thesectiondis{\thesection} |
1626 |
\def\thesubsectiondis{\thesectiondis.\arabic{subsection}} |
1627 |
\def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis.\arabic{subsubsection}} |
1628 |
\def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis.\arabic{paragraph}} |
1629 |
\fi |
1630 |
\else% not compsoc |
1631 |
\def\thesectiondis{\thesection.} % I. |
1632 |
\def\thesubsectiondis{\Alph{subsection}.} % B. |
1633 |
\def\thesubsubsectiondis{\arabic{subsubsection})} % 3) |
1634 |
\def\theparagraphdis{\alph{paragraph})} % d) |
1635 |
\fi |
1636 |
|
1637 |
% just like LaTeX2e's \@eqnnum |
1638 |
\def\theequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theequation)}}% (1) |
1639 |
% IEEEsubequation used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray |
1640 |
\def\theIEEEsubequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theIEEEsubequation)}}% (1a) |
1641 |
% redirect LaTeX2e's equation number display and all that depend on |
1642 |
% it, through IEEEtran's \theequationdis |
1643 |
\def\@eqnnum{\theequationdis} |
1644 |
|
1645 |
|
1646 |
|
1647 |
% V1.7 provide string macros as article.cls does |
1648 |
\def\contentsname{Contents} |
1649 |
\def\listfigurename{List of Figures} |
1650 |
\def\listtablename{List of Tables} |
1651 |
\def\refname{References} |
1652 |
\def\indexname{Index} |
1653 |
\def\figurename{Fig.} |
1654 |
\def\tablename{TABLE} |
1655 |
\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\figurename{Figure}\def\tablename{Table}} |
1656 |
\def\partname{Part} |
1657 |
\def\appendixname{Appendix} |
1658 |
\def\abstractname{Abstract} |
1659 |
% IEEE specific names |
1660 |
\def\IEEEkeywordsname{Keywords} |
1661 |
\def\IEEEproofname{Proof} |
1662 |
|
1663 |
|
1664 |
% LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES AND TABLE OF CONTENTS |
1665 |
% |
1666 |
\def\@pnumwidth{1.55em} |
1667 |
\def\@tocrmarg{2.55em} |
1668 |
\def\@dotsep{4.5} |
1669 |
\setcounter{tocdepth}{3} |
1670 |
|
1671 |
% adjusted some spacings here so that section numbers will not easily |
1672 |
% collide with the section titles. |
1673 |
% VIII; VIII-A; and VIII-A.1 are usually the worst offenders. |
1674 |
% MDS 1/2001 |
1675 |
\def\tableofcontents{\section*{\contentsname}\@starttoc{toc}} |
1676 |
\def\l@section#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}\addvspace{1.0em plus 1pt}% |
1677 |
\@tempdima 2.75em \begingroup \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth% |
1678 |
\parfillskip-\@pnumwidth {\bfseries\leavevmode #1}\hfil\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par% |
1679 |
\endgroup} |
1680 |
% argument format #1:level, #2:labelindent,#3:labelsep |
1681 |
\def\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{2.75em}{3.75em}} |
1682 |
\def\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{6.5em}{4.5em}} |
1683 |
% must provide \l@ defs for ALL sublevels EVEN if tocdepth |
1684 |
% is such as they will not appear in the table of contents |
1685 |
% these defs are how TOC knows what level these things are! |
1686 |
\def\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{6.5em}{5.5em}} |
1687 |
\def\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{6.5em}{6.5em}} |
1688 |
\def\listoffigures{\section*{\listfigurename}\@starttoc{lof}} |
1689 |
\def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{0em}{2.75em}} |
1690 |
\def\listoftables{\section*{\listtablename}\@starttoc{lot}} |
1691 |
\let\l@table\l@figure |
1692 |
|
1693 |
|
1694 |
%% Definitions for floats |
1695 |
%% |
1696 |
%% Normal Floats |
1697 |
\floatsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip |
1698 |
\textfloatsep 1.7\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.4\baselineskip |
1699 |
\@fptop 0pt plus 1fil |
1700 |
\@fpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil |
1701 |
\@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil |
1702 |
\def\topfraction{0.9} |
1703 |
\def\bottomfraction{0.4} |
1704 |
\def\floatpagefraction{0.8} |
1705 |
% V1.7, let top floats approach 90% of page |
1706 |
\def\textfraction{0.1} |
1707 |
|
1708 |
%% Double Column Floats |
1709 |
\dblfloatsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip |
1710 |
|
1711 |
\dbltextfloatsep 1.7\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.4\baselineskip |
1712 |
% Note that it would be nice if the rubber here actually worked in LaTeX2e. |
1713 |
% There is a long standing limitation in LaTeX, first discovered (to the best |
1714 |
% of my knowledge) by Alan Jeffrey in 1992. LaTeX ignores the stretchable |
1715 |
% portion of \dbltextfloatsep, and as a result, double column figures can and |
1716 |
% do result in an non-integer number of lines in the main text columns with |
1717 |
% underfull vbox errors as a consequence. A post to comp.text.tex |
1718 |
% by Donald Arseneau confirms that this had not yet been fixed in 1998. |
1719 |
% IEEEtran V1.6 will fix this problem for you in the titles, but it doesn't |
1720 |
% protect you from other double floats. Happy vspace'ing. |
1721 |
|
1722 |
\@dblfptop 0pt plus 1fil |
1723 |
\@dblfpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil |
1724 |
\@dblfpbot 0pt plus 1fil |
1725 |
\def\dbltopfraction{0.8} |
1726 |
\def\dblfloatpagefraction{0.8} |
1727 |
\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{4} |
1728 |
|
1729 |
\intextsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip |
1730 |
\setcounter{topnumber}{2} |
1731 |
\setcounter{bottomnumber}{2} |
1732 |
\setcounter{totalnumber}{4} |
1733 |
|
1734 |
|
1735 |
|
1736 |
% article class provides these, we should too. |
1737 |
\newlength\abovecaptionskip |
1738 |
\newlength\belowcaptionskip |
1739 |
% but only \abovecaptionskip is used above figure captions and *below* table |
1740 |
% captions |
1741 |
\setlength\abovecaptionskip{0.65\baselineskip} |
1742 |
\setlength\belowcaptionskip{0.75\baselineskip} |
1743 |
% V1.6 create hooks in case the caption spacing ever needs to be |
1744 |
% overridden by a user |
1745 |
\def\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}% |
1746 |
\def\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace{\vskip\belowcaptionskip\relax}% |
1747 |
|
1748 |
|
1749 |
% 1.6b revise caption system so that \@makecaption uses two arguments |
1750 |
% as with LaTeX2e. Otherwise, there will be problems when using hyperref. |
1751 |
\def\@IEEEtablestring{table} |
1752 |
|
1753 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
1754 |
% V1.7 compsoc \@makecaption |
1755 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference |
1756 |
\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{% |
1757 |
% test if is a for a figure or table |
1758 |
\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring% |
1759 |
% if a table, do table caption |
1760 |
\normalsize\begin{center}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}\end{center}% |
1761 |
\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace |
1762 |
% if not a table, format it as a figure |
1763 |
\else |
1764 |
\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace |
1765 |
\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}% |
1766 |
\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize% |
1767 |
% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around |
1768 |
\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ }% |
1769 |
\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}% |
1770 |
% if caption is shorter than a line, center |
1771 |
\else% |
1772 |
\hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% |
1773 |
\fi\fi} |
1774 |
\else% nonconference compsoc |
1775 |
\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{% |
1776 |
% test if is a for a figure or table |
1777 |
\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring% |
1778 |
% if a table, do table caption |
1779 |
\normalsize\begin{center}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize #1}\\{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize #2}\end{center}% |
1780 |
\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace |
1781 |
% if not a table, format it as a figure |
1782 |
\else |
1783 |
\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace |
1784 |
\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}% |
1785 |
\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize% |
1786 |
% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around |
1787 |
\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ }% |
1788 |
\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}% |
1789 |
% if caption is shorter than a line, left justify |
1790 |
\else% |
1791 |
\hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% |
1792 |
\fi\fi} |
1793 |
\fi |
1794 |
|
1795 |
\else% traditional noncompsoc \@makecaption |
1796 |
\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{% |
1797 |
% test if is a for a figure or table |
1798 |
\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring% |
1799 |
% if a table, do table caption |
1800 |
\footnotesize{\centering\normalfont\footnotesize#1.\qquad\scshape #2\par}% |
1801 |
\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace |
1802 |
% if not a table, format it as a figure |
1803 |
\else |
1804 |
\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace |
1805 |
% 3/2001 use footnotesize, not small; use two nonbreaking spaces, not one |
1806 |
\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}~~ #2}% |
1807 |
\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize% |
1808 |
% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around |
1809 |
\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}~~ }% |
1810 |
\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\footnotesize\noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}% |
1811 |
% if caption is shorter than a line, center if conference, left justify otherwise |
1812 |
\else% |
1813 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% |
1814 |
\else \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% |
1815 |
\fi\fi\fi} |
1816 |
\fi |
1817 |
|
1818 |
|
1819 |
|
1820 |
% V1.7 disable captions class option, do so in a way that retains operation of \label |
1821 |
% within \caption |
1822 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff |
1823 |
\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{\vspace*{2em}\footnotesize\begin{center}{\footnotesize #1}\end{center}% |
1824 |
\let\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave\label |
1825 |
\let\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax |
1826 |
\def\label##1{\gdef\@IEEEtemplabelargsave{##1}}% |
1827 |
\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#2}% |
1828 |
\let\label\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave |
1829 |
\ifx\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax\else\label{\@IEEEtemplabelargsave}\fi} |
1830 |
\fi |
1831 |
|
1832 |
|
1833 |
% V1.7 define end environments with \def not \let so as to work OK with |
1834 |
% preview-latex |
1835 |
\newcounter{figure} |
1836 |
\def\thefigure{\@arabic\c@figure} |
1837 |
\def\fps@figure{tbp} |
1838 |
\def\ftype@figure{1} |
1839 |
\def\ext@figure{lof} |
1840 |
\def\fnum@figure{\figurename~\thefigure} |
1841 |
\def\figure{\@float{figure}} |
1842 |
\def\endfigure{\end@float} |
1843 |
\@namedef{figure*}{\@dblfloat{figure}} |
1844 |
\@namedef{endfigure*}{\end@dblfloat} |
1845 |
\newcounter{table} |
1846 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
1847 |
\def\thetable{\arabic{table}} |
1848 |
\else |
1849 |
\def\thetable{\@Roman\c@table} |
1850 |
\fi |
1851 |
\def\fps@table{tbp} |
1852 |
\def\ftype@table{2} |
1853 |
\def\ext@table{lot} |
1854 |
\def\fnum@table{\tablename~\thetable} |
1855 |
% V1.6 IEEE uses 8pt text for tables |
1856 |
% to default to footnotesize, we hack into LaTeX2e's \@floatboxreset and pray |
1857 |
\def\table{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\scriptsize\@setminipage}% |
1858 |
\let\@makefntext\@maketablefntext |
1859 |
\@float{table}} |
1860 |
\def\endtable{\end@float} |
1861 |
% v1.6b double column tables need to default to footnotesize as well. |
1862 |
\@namedef{table*}{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\scriptsize\@setminipage}\@dblfloat{table}} |
1863 |
\@namedef{endtable*}{\end@dblfloat} |
1864 |
|
1865 |
|
1866 |
|
1867 |
|
1868 |
%% |
1869 |
%% START OF IEEEeqnarry DEFINITIONS |
1870 |
%% |
1871 |
%% Inspired by the concepts, examples, and previous works of LaTeX |
1872 |
%% coders and developers such as Donald Arseneau, Fred Bartlett, |
1873 |
%% David Carlisle, Tony Liu, Frank Mittelbach, Piet van Oostrum, |
1874 |
%% Roland Winkler and Mark Wooding. |
1875 |
%% I don't make the claim that my work here is even near their calibre. ;) |
1876 |
|
1877 |
|
1878 |
% hook to allow easy changeover to IEEEtran.cls/tools.sty error reporting |
1879 |
\def\@IEEEclspkgerror{\ClassError{IEEEtran}} |
1880 |
|
1881 |
\newif\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform% flag to indicate if the environment was called as the star form |
1882 |
\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse |
1883 |
|
1884 |
\newif\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt% tracks if the environment should advance the col counter |
1885 |
% allows a way to make an \IEEEeqnarraybox that can be used within an \IEEEeqnarray |
1886 |
% used by IEEEeqnarraymulticol so that it can work properly in both |
1887 |
\@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue |
1888 |
|
1889 |
\newcount\@IEEEeqnnumcols % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols are defined |
1890 |
\newcount\@IEEEeqncolcnt % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols the user actually used |
1891 |
|
1892 |
|
1893 |
% The default math style used by the columns |
1894 |
\def\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{\displaystyle} |
1895 |
% The default text style used by the columns |
1896 |
% default to using the current font |
1897 |
\def\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle{\relax} |
1898 |
|
1899 |
% like the iedlistdecl but for \IEEEeqnarray |
1900 |
\def\IEEEeqnarraydecl{\relax} |
1901 |
\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl{\relax} |
1902 |
|
1903 |
% \yesnumber is the opposite of \nonumber |
1904 |
% a novel concept with the same def as the equationarray package |
1905 |
% However, we give IEEE versions too since some LaTeX packages such as |
1906 |
% the MDWtools mathenv.sty redefine \nonumber to something else. |
1907 |
\providecommand{\yesnumber}{\global\@eqnswtrue} |
1908 |
\def\IEEEyesnumber{\global\@eqnswtrue} |
1909 |
\def\IEEEnonumber{\global\@eqnswfalse} |
1910 |
|
1911 |
|
1912 |
\def\IEEEyessubnumber{\global\@IEEEissubequationtrue\global\@eqnswtrue% |
1913 |
\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% only do something inside an IEEEeqnarray |
1914 |
\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation\addtocounter{equation}{-1}\else\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{1}\fi% |
1915 |
\def\@currentlabel{\p@IEEEsubequation\theIEEEsubequation}\fi} |
1916 |
|
1917 |
% flag to indicate that an equation is a sub equation |
1918 |
\newif\if@IEEEissubequation% |
1919 |
\@IEEEissubequationfalse |
1920 |
|
1921 |
% allows users to "push away" equations that get too close to the equation numbers |
1922 |
\def\IEEEeqnarraynumspace{\hphantom{\if@IEEEissubequation\theIEEEsubequationdis\else\theequationdis\fi}} |
1923 |
|
1924 |
% provides a way to span multiple columns within IEEEeqnarray environments |
1925 |
% will consider \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt before globally advancing the |
1926 |
% column counter - so as to work within \IEEEeqnarraybox |
1927 |
% usage: \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{number cols. to span}{col type}{cell text} |
1928 |
\long\def\IEEEeqnarraymulticol#1#2#3{\multispan{#1}% |
1929 |
% check if column is defined |
1930 |
\relax\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#2\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined% |
1931 |
\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#2\endcsname#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% |
1932 |
\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#2\endcsname% |
1933 |
\else% if not, error and use default type |
1934 |
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#2" in \string\IEEEeqnarraymulticol.\MessageBreak |
1935 |
Using a default centering column instead}% |
1936 |
{You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}% |
1937 |
\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE@IEEEdefault\endcsname#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% |
1938 |
\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST@IEEEdefault\endcsname% |
1939 |
\fi% |
1940 |
% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it |
1941 |
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by #1\relax\fi} |
1942 |
|
1943 |
% like \omit, but maintains track of the column counter for \IEEEeqnarray |
1944 |
\def\IEEEeqnarrayomit{\omit\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax\fi} |
1945 |
|
1946 |
|
1947 |
% provides a way to define a letter referenced column type |
1948 |
% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{col. type letter/name}{pre insertion text}{post insertion text} |
1949 |
\def\IEEEeqnarraydefcol#1#2#3{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#1\endcsname{#2}% |
1950 |
\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#1\endcsname{#3}% |
1951 |
\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname{1}} |
1952 |
|
1953 |
|
1954 |
% provides a way to define a numerically referenced inter-column glue types |
1955 |
% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep{col. glue number}{glue definition} |
1956 |
\def\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep#1#2{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\romannumeral #1\endcsname{#2}% |
1957 |
\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\romannumeral #1\endcsname{1}} |
1958 |
|
1959 |
|
1960 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined{1}% just a macro for 1, used for checking undefined column types |
1961 |
|
1962 |
|
1963 |
% expands and appends the given argument to the \@IEEEtrantmptoksA token list |
1964 |
% used to build up the \halign preamble |
1965 |
\def\@IEEEappendtoksA#1{\edef\@@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA #1}}% |
1966 |
\@@IEEEappendtoksA} |
1967 |
|
1968 |
% also appends to \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, but does not expand the argument |
1969 |
% uses \toks8 as a scratchpad register |
1970 |
\def\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA#1{\toks8={#1}% |
1971 |
\edef\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\the\toks8}}% |
1972 |
\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA} |
1973 |
|
1974 |
% define some common column types for the user |
1975 |
% math |
1976 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{l}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil} |
1977 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{c}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil} |
1978 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{r}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$} |
1979 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{L}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil} |
1980 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{C}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil} |
1981 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{R}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$} |
1982 |
% text |
1983 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{s}{\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil} |
1984 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{t}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil} |
1985 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{u}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{} |
1986 |
|
1987 |
% vertical rules |
1988 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{v}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} |
1989 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{vv}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} |
1990 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{V}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} |
1991 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{VV}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}% |
1992 |
{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} |
1993 |
|
1994 |
% horizontal rules |
1995 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{h}{}{\leaders\hrule height\arrayrulewidth\hfil} |
1996 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{H}{}{\leaders\vbox{\hrule width\arrayrulewidth\vskip\doublerulesep\hrule width\arrayrulewidth}\hfil} |
1997 |
|
1998 |
% plain |
1999 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{x}{}{} |
2000 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{X}{$}{$} |
2001 |
|
2002 |
% the default column type to use in the event a column type is not defined |
2003 |
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{@IEEEdefault}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil} |
2004 |
|
2005 |
|
2006 |
% a zero tabskip (used for "-" col types) |
2007 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero{0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt} |
2008 |
% a centering tabskip (used for "+" col types) |
2009 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter{1000pt plus 0pt minus 1000pt} |
2010 |
|
2011 |
% top level default tabskip glues for the start, end, and inter-column |
2012 |
% may be reset within environments not always at the top level, e.g., \IEEEeqnarraybox |
2013 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default start glue |
2014 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default end glue |
2015 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue |
2016 |
|
2017 |
|
2018 |
|
2019 |
% creates a vertical rule that extends from the bottom to the top a a cell |
2020 |
% Provided in case other packages redefine \vline some other way. |
2021 |
% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayvrule[rule thickness] |
2022 |
% If no argument is provided, \arrayrulewidth will be used for the rule thickness. |
2023 |
\newcommand\IEEEeqnarrayvrule[1][\arrayrulewidth]{\vrule\@width#1\relax} |
2024 |
|
2025 |
% creates a blank separator row |
2026 |
% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[separation length][font size commands] |
2027 |
% default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax] |
2028 |
% blank arguments inherit the default values |
2029 |
% uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers |
2030 |
\def\IEEEeqnarrayseprow{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}} |
2031 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][\relax]}} |
2032 |
\def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}% |
2033 |
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty% |
2034 |
% get the skip value, based on the font commands |
2035 |
% use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3 |
2036 |
% assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes |
2037 |
{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}% |
2038 |
\else% |
2039 |
{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}% |
2040 |
\fi% |
2041 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax} |
2042 |
|
2043 |
% creates a blank separator row, but omits all the column templates |
2044 |
% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[separation length][font size commands] |
2045 |
% default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax] |
2046 |
% blank arguments inherit the default values |
2047 |
% uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers |
2048 |
\def\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols |
2049 |
% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it |
2050 |
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% |
2051 |
\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}} |
2052 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][\relax]}} |
2053 |
\def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}% |
2054 |
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty% |
2055 |
% get the skip value, based on the font commands |
2056 |
% use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3 |
2057 |
% assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes |
2058 |
{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}% |
2059 |
\else% |
2060 |
{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}% |
2061 |
\fi% |
2062 |
\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax} |
2063 |
|
2064 |
|
2065 |
|
2066 |
% draws a single rule across all the columns optional |
2067 |
% argument determines the rule width, \arrayrulewidth is the default |
2068 |
% updates column counter as needed and turns off struts |
2069 |
% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[rule line thickness] |
2070 |
\def\IEEEeqnarrayrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols |
2071 |
% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it |
2072 |
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% |
2073 |
\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}} |
2074 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]{\leaders\hrule height#1\hfil\relax% put in our rule |
2075 |
% turn off any struts |
2076 |
\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]\relax} |
2077 |
|
2078 |
|
2079 |
% draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator row, and then |
2080 |
% another single rule row |
2081 |
% first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default |
2082 |
% second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default |
2083 |
% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing] |
2084 |
\def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols |
2085 |
% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it |
2086 |
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% |
2087 |
\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}} |
2088 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]}% |
2089 |
{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][\doublerulesep]}} |
2090 |
\def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% |
2091 |
% we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][] |
2092 |
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% |
2093 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% |
2094 |
\else% |
2095 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]\relax% |
2096 |
\fi% |
2097 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}% |
2098 |
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% |
2099 |
\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[\doublerulesep][\relax]% |
2100 |
\else% |
2101 |
\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#2][\relax]% |
2102 |
\fi% |
2103 |
\\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}% |
2104 |
% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it |
2105 |
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% |
2106 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% |
2107 |
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% |
2108 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% |
2109 |
\else% |
2110 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]% |
2111 |
\fi% |
2112 |
} |
2113 |
|
2114 |
% draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator (cutting) row, and then |
2115 |
% another single rule row |
2116 |
% first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default |
2117 |
% second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default |
2118 |
% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing] |
2119 |
\def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols |
2120 |
% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it |
2121 |
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% |
2122 |
\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[\arrayrulewidth]}} |
2123 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]}% |
2124 |
{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][\doublerulesep]}} |
2125 |
\def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% |
2126 |
% we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][] |
2127 |
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% |
2128 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% |
2129 |
\else% |
2130 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]% |
2131 |
\fi% |
2132 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}% |
2133 |
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% |
2134 |
\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[\doublerulesep][\relax]% |
2135 |
\else% |
2136 |
\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#2][\relax]% |
2137 |
\fi% |
2138 |
\\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}% |
2139 |
% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it |
2140 |
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% |
2141 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% |
2142 |
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% |
2143 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% |
2144 |
\else% |
2145 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]% |
2146 |
\fi% |
2147 |
} |
2148 |
|
2149 |
|
2150 |
|
2151 |
% inserts a full row's worth of &'s |
2152 |
% relies on \@IEEEeqnnumcols to provide the correct number of columns |
2153 |
% uses \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, \count0 as scratch registers |
2154 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}\count0=1\relax% |
2155 |
\loop% add cols if the user did not use them all |
2156 |
\ifnum\count0<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax% |
2157 |
\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}% |
2158 |
\advance\count0 by 1\relax% update the col count |
2159 |
\repeat% |
2160 |
\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA%execute the &'s |
2161 |
} |
2162 |
|
2163 |
|
2164 |
|
2165 |
\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner % flag to indicate if we are within the lines |
2166 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % of an IEEEeqnarray - after the IEEEeqnarraydecl |
2167 |
|
2168 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{0pt} % height and depth of IEEEeqnarray struts |
2169 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{0pt} |
2170 |
|
2171 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{0pt} % default height and depth of |
2172 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{0pt} % struts within an IEEEeqnarray |
2173 |
|
2174 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{0pt} % saved master strut height |
2175 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{0pt} % and depth |
2176 |
|
2177 |
\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut % flag to indicate that the master strut value |
2178 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue % is to be used |
2179 |
|
2180 |
|
2181 |
|
2182 |
% saves the strut height and depth of the master strut |
2183 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave{\relax% |
2184 |
\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% |
2185 |
\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% |
2186 |
% remove stretchability |
2187 |
\dimen0\skip0\relax% |
2188 |
\dimen2\skip2\relax% |
2189 |
% save values |
2190 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{\the\dimen0}% |
2191 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{\the\dimen2}} |
2192 |
|
2193 |
% restores the strut height and depth of the master strut |
2194 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore{\relax% |
2195 |
\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE\relax% |
2196 |
\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE\relax% |
2197 |
% remove stretchability |
2198 |
\dimen0\skip0\relax% |
2199 |
\dimen2\skip2\relax% |
2200 |
% restore values |
2201 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% |
2202 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}} |
2203 |
|
2204 |
|
2205 |
% globally restores the strut height and depth to the |
2206 |
% master values and sets the master strut flag to true |
2207 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset{\relax% |
2208 |
\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% |
2209 |
\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% |
2210 |
% remove stretchability |
2211 |
\dimen0\skip0\relax% |
2212 |
\dimen2\skip2\relax% |
2213 |
% restore values |
2214 |
\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% |
2215 |
\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% |
2216 |
\global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue} |
2217 |
|
2218 |
|
2219 |
% if the master strut is not to be used, make the current |
2220 |
% values of \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight, \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth |
2221 |
% and the use master strut flag, global |
2222 |
% this allows user strut commands issued in the last column to be carried |
2223 |
% into the isolation/strut column |
2224 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus{\relax% |
2225 |
\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut\else% |
2226 |
\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight}% |
2227 |
\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth}% |
2228 |
\global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% |
2229 |
\fi} |
2230 |
|
2231 |
|
2232 |
|
2233 |
% usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{height}{depth}[font size commands] |
2234 |
% If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, sets the height |
2235 |
% and depth of both the master and local struts. If called inside |
2236 |
% an IEEEeqnarray line, sets the height and depth of the local strut |
2237 |
% only and sets the flag to indicate the use of the local strut |
2238 |
% values. If the height or depth is left blank, 0.7\normalbaselineskip |
2239 |
% and 0.3\normalbaselineskip will be used, respectively. |
2240 |
% The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under |
2241 |
% a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current |
2242 |
% font is used. |
2243 |
% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2 |
2244 |
\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}[\relax]}} |
2245 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#1}% |
2246 |
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty% |
2247 |
{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.7\normalbaselineskip}}% |
2248 |
\skip0=\skip3\relax% |
2249 |
\else% arg one present |
2250 |
{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1\relax}}% |
2251 |
\skip0=\skip3\relax% |
2252 |
\fi% if null arg |
2253 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#2}% |
2254 |
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty% |
2255 |
{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.3\normalbaselineskip}}% |
2256 |
\skip2=\skip3\relax% |
2257 |
\else% arg two present |
2258 |
{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2\relax}}% |
2259 |
\skip2=\skip3\relax% |
2260 |
\fi% if null arg |
2261 |
% remove stretchability, just to be safe |
2262 |
\dimen0\skip0\relax% |
2263 |
\dimen2\skip2\relax% |
2264 |
% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth |
2265 |
\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size |
2266 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% |
2267 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% |
2268 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master |
2269 |
\else% outer, have to set master strut too |
2270 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% |
2271 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% |
2272 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% |
2273 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% |
2274 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut |
2275 |
\fi} |
2276 |
|
2277 |
|
2278 |
% usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{added height}{added depth}[font size commands] |
2279 |
% If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, adds the given height |
2280 |
% and depth to both the master and local struts. |
2281 |
% If called inside an IEEEeqnarray line, adds the given height and depth |
2282 |
% to the local strut only and sets the flag to indicate the use |
2283 |
% of the local strut values. |
2284 |
% In both cases, if a height or depth is left blank, 0pt is used instead. |
2285 |
% The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under |
2286 |
% a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current |
2287 |
% font is used. |
2288 |
% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2 |
2289 |
\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}[\relax]}} |
2290 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#1}% |
2291 |
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty% |
2292 |
\skip0=0pt\relax% |
2293 |
\else% arg one present |
2294 |
{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1}}% |
2295 |
\skip0=\skip3\relax% |
2296 |
\fi% if null arg |
2297 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#2}% |
2298 |
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty% |
2299 |
\skip2=0pt\relax% |
2300 |
\else% arg two present |
2301 |
{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2}}% |
2302 |
\skip2=\skip3\relax% |
2303 |
\fi% if null arg |
2304 |
% remove stretchability, just to be safe |
2305 |
\dimen0\skip0\relax% |
2306 |
\dimen2\skip2\relax% |
2307 |
% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth |
2308 |
\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size |
2309 |
% get local strut size |
2310 |
\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax% |
2311 |
\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax% |
2312 |
% add it to the user supplied values |
2313 |
\advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax% |
2314 |
\advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax% |
2315 |
% update the local strut size |
2316 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% |
2317 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% |
2318 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master |
2319 |
\else% outer, have to set master strut too |
2320 |
% get master strut size |
2321 |
\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% |
2322 |
\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% |
2323 |
% add it to the user supplied values |
2324 |
\advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax% |
2325 |
\advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax% |
2326 |
% update the local and master strut sizes |
2327 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% |
2328 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% |
2329 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% |
2330 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% |
2331 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut |
2332 |
\fi} |
2333 |
|
2334 |
|
2335 |
% allow user a way to see the struts |
2336 |
\newif\ifIEEEvisiblestruts |
2337 |
\IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse |
2338 |
|
2339 |
% inserts an invisible strut using the master or local strut values |
2340 |
% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \dimen0, \dimen2 |
2341 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut{\relax% |
2342 |
\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut |
2343 |
% get master strut size |
2344 |
\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% |
2345 |
\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% |
2346 |
\else% |
2347 |
% get local strut size |
2348 |
\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax% |
2349 |
\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax% |
2350 |
\fi% |
2351 |
% remove stretchability, probably not needed |
2352 |
\dimen0\skip0\relax% |
2353 |
\dimen2\skip2\relax% |
2354 |
% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth |
2355 |
% allow user to see struts if desired |
2356 |
\ifIEEEvisiblestruts% |
2357 |
\vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax% |
2358 |
\else% |
2359 |
\vrule width0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi} |
2360 |
|
2361 |
|
2362 |
% creates an invisible strut, useable even outside \IEEEeqnarray |
2363 |
% if \IEEEvisiblestrutstrue, the strut will be visible and 0.2pt wide. |
2364 |
% usage: \IEEEstrut[height][depth][font size commands] |
2365 |
% default is \IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip][0.3\normalbaselineskip][\relax] |
2366 |
% blank arguments inherit the default values |
2367 |
% uses \dimen0, \dimen2, \skip0, \skip2 |
2368 |
\def\IEEEstrut{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEstrut}{\@IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip]}} |
2369 |
\def\@IEEEstrut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEstrut[#1]}{\@@IEEEstrut[#1][0.3\normalbaselineskip]}} |
2370 |
\def\@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]}{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][\relax]}} |
2371 |
\def\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][#3]{\mbox{#3\relax% |
2372 |
\def\@IEEEstrutARG{#1}% |
2373 |
\ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty% |
2374 |
\skip0=0.7\normalbaselineskip\relax% |
2375 |
\else% |
2376 |
\skip0=#1\relax% |
2377 |
\fi% |
2378 |
\def\@IEEEstrutARG{#2}% |
2379 |
\ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty% |
2380 |
\skip2=0.3\normalbaselineskip\relax% |
2381 |
\else% |
2382 |
\skip2=#2\relax% |
2383 |
\fi% |
2384 |
% remove stretchability, probably not needed |
2385 |
\dimen0\skip0\relax% |
2386 |
\dimen2\skip2\relax% |
2387 |
\ifIEEEvisiblestruts% |
2388 |
\vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax% |
2389 |
\else% |
2390 |
\vrule width0.0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi}} |
2391 |
|
2392 |
|
2393 |
% enables strut mode by setting a default strut size and then zeroing the |
2394 |
% \baselineskip, \lineskip, \lineskiplimit and \jot |
2395 |
\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutmode{\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0.7\normalbaselineskip}{0.3\normalbaselineskip}[\relax]% |
2396 |
\baselineskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt\lineskiplimit=0pt\jot=0pt} |
2397 |
|
2398 |
|
2399 |
|
2400 |
\def\IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarray} |
2401 |
\def\endIEEEeqnarray{\end@IEEEeqnarray} |
2402 |
|
2403 |
\@namedef{IEEEeqnarray*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarray} |
2404 |
\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarray*}{\end@IEEEeqnarray} |
2405 |
|
2406 |
|
2407 |
% \IEEEeqnarray is an enhanced \eqnarray. |
2408 |
% The star form defaults to not putting equation numbers at the end of each row. |
2409 |
% usage: \IEEEeqnarray[decl]{cols} |
2410 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarray{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarray}{\@@IEEEeqnarray[\relax]}} |
2411 |
\def\@@IEEEeqnarray[#1]#2{% |
2412 |
% default to showing the equation number or not based on whether or not |
2413 |
% the star form was involked |
2414 |
\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\global\@eqnswfalse |
2415 |
\else% not the star form |
2416 |
\global\@eqnswtrue |
2417 |
\fi% if star form |
2418 |
\@IEEEissubequationfalse% default to no subequations |
2419 |
\@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse% assume last line is not a sub equation |
2420 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse% not yet within the lines of the halign |
2421 |
\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default |
2422 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise |
2423 |
\IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off |
2424 |
% no extra space unless the user specifically requests it |
2425 |
\lineskip=0pt\relax |
2426 |
\lineskiplimit=0pt\relax |
2427 |
\baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax% |
2428 |
\jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax% |
2429 |
\mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math |
2430 |
\@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue% advance the col counter for each col the user uses, |
2431 |
% used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build |
2432 |
\stepcounter{equation}% advance equation counter before first line |
2433 |
\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}% no subequation yet |
2434 |
\def\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}% redefine the ref label |
2435 |
\IEEEeqnarraydecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides |
2436 |
#1\relax% allow user to override defaults |
2437 |
\let\\\@IEEEeqnarraycr% replace newline with one that can put in eqn. numbers |
2438 |
\global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@% col. count = 0 for first line |
2439 |
\@IEEEbuildpreamble #2\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA |
2440 |
% put in the column for the equation number |
2441 |
\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first |
2442 |
\toks0={##}% |
2443 |
% advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the isolation col, this helps with error checking |
2444 |
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}% |
2445 |
% add the isolation column |
2446 |
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}% |
2447 |
% advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the equation number col, this helps with error checking |
2448 |
\@IEEEappendtoksA{&\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}% |
2449 |
% add the equation number col to the preamble |
2450 |
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\hb@xt@\z@\bgroup\hss\the\toks0\egroup}% |
2451 |
% note \@IEEEeqnnumcols does not count the equation col or isolation col |
2452 |
% set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build |
2453 |
\tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax |
2454 |
% begin the display alignment |
2455 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines |
2456 |
$$\everycr{}\halign to\displaywidth\bgroup |
2457 |
% "exspand" the preamble |
2458 |
\span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr} |
2459 |
|
2460 |
% enter isolation/strut column (or the next column if the user did not use |
2461 |
% every column), record the strut status, complete the columns, do the strut if needed, |
2462 |
% restore counters to correct values and exit |
2463 |
\def\end@IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&\@@IEEEeqnarraycr\egroup% |
2464 |
\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation\global\advance\c@IEEEsubequation\m@ne\fi% |
2465 |
\global\advance\c@equation\m@ne% |
2466 |
$$\@ignoretrue} |
2467 |
|
2468 |
% need a way to remember if last line is a subequation |
2469 |
\newif\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation% |
2470 |
\@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse |
2471 |
|
2472 |
% IEEEeqnarray uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to |
2473 |
% end rows. This allows for things like \\*[vskip amount] |
2474 |
% This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray |
2475 |
% the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid |
2476 |
% altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the next column |
2477 |
% as there is an isolation/strut column after the user's columns |
2478 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&% save strut status and advance to next column |
2479 |
{\ifnum0=`}\fi |
2480 |
\@ifstar{% |
2481 |
\global\@eqpen\@M\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR |
2482 |
}{% |
2483 |
\global\@eqpen\interdisplaylinepenalty \@IEEEeqnarrayYCR |
2484 |
}% |
2485 |
} |
2486 |
|
2487 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR\z@skip} |
2488 |
|
2489 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR[#1]{% |
2490 |
\ifnum0=`{\fi}% |
2491 |
\@@IEEEeqnarraycr |
2492 |
\noalign{\penalty\@eqpen\vskip\jot\vskip #1\relax}}% |
2493 |
|
2494 |
\def\@@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register |
2495 |
\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by -1\relax% adjust col count because of the isolation column |
2496 |
\ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt>\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax |
2497 |
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Too many columns within the IEEEeqnarray\MessageBreak |
2498 |
environment}% |
2499 |
{Use fewer \string &'s or put more columns in the IEEEeqnarry column\MessageBreak |
2500 |
specifications.}\relax% |
2501 |
\else |
2502 |
\loop% add cols if the user did not use them all |
2503 |
\ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax |
2504 |
\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}% |
2505 |
\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax% update the col count |
2506 |
\repeat |
2507 |
% this number of &'s will take us the the isolation column |
2508 |
\fi |
2509 |
% execute the &'s |
2510 |
\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA% |
2511 |
% handle the strut/isolation column |
2512 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do the strut if needed |
2513 |
\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray |
2514 |
&% and enter the equation number column |
2515 |
% is this line needs an equation number, display it and advance the |
2516 |
% (sub)equation counters, record what type this line was |
2517 |
\if@eqnsw% |
2518 |
\if@IEEEissubequation\theIEEEsubequationdis\addtocounter{equation}{1}\stepcounter{IEEEsubequation}% |
2519 |
\global\@IEEElastlinewassubequationtrue% |
2520 |
\else% display a standard equation number, initialize the IEEEsubequation counter |
2521 |
\theequationdis\stepcounter{equation}\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}% |
2522 |
\global\@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse\fi% |
2523 |
\fi% |
2524 |
% reset the eqnsw flag to indicate default preference of the display of equation numbers |
2525 |
\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\global\@eqnswfalse\else\global\@eqnswtrue\fi |
2526 |
\global\@IEEEissubequationfalse% reset the subequation flag |
2527 |
% reset the number of columns the user actually used |
2528 |
\global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@\relax |
2529 |
% the real end of the line |
2530 |
\cr} |
2531 |
|
2532 |
|
2533 |
|
2534 |
|
2535 |
|
2536 |
% \IEEEeqnarraybox is like \IEEEeqnarray except the box form puts everything |
2537 |
% inside a vtop, vbox, or vcenter box depending on the letter in the second |
2538 |
% optional argument (t,b,c). Vbox is the default. Unlike \IEEEeqnarray, |
2539 |
% equation numbers are not displayed and \IEEEeqnarraybox can be nested. |
2540 |
% \IEEEeqnarrayboxm is for math mode (like \array) and does not put the vbox |
2541 |
% within an hbox. |
2542 |
% \IEEEeqnarrayboxt is for text mode (like \tabular) and puts the vbox within |
2543 |
% a \hbox{$ $} construct. |
2544 |
% \IEEEeqnarraybox will auto detect whether to use \IEEEeqnarrayboxm or |
2545 |
% \IEEEeqnarrayboxt depending on the math mode. |
2546 |
% The third optional argument specifies the width this box is to be set to - |
2547 |
% natural width is the default. |
2548 |
% The * forms do not add \jot line spacing |
2549 |
% usage: \IEEEeqnarraybox[decl][pos][width]{cols} |
2550 |
\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxm{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
2551 |
\def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxm{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
2552 |
\@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
2553 |
\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
2554 |
|
2555 |
\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxt{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
2556 |
\def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxt{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
2557 |
\@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
2558 |
\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
2559 |
|
2560 |
\def\IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi% |
2561 |
\@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
2562 |
\def\endIEEEeqnarraybox{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
2563 |
|
2564 |
\@namedef{IEEEeqnarraybox*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi% |
2565 |
\@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
2566 |
\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarraybox*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
2567 |
|
2568 |
% flag to indicate if the \IEEEeqnarraybox needs to put things into an hbox{$ $} |
2569 |
% for \vcenter in non-math mode |
2570 |
\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW% |
2571 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse |
2572 |
|
2573 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarraybox{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox}{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[\relax]}} |
2574 |
\def\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]}{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][b]}} |
2575 |
\def\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]}{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][\relax]}} |
2576 |
|
2577 |
% #1 = decl; #2 = t,b,c; #3 = width, #4 = col specs |
2578 |
\def\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][#3]#4{\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % not yet within the lines of the halign |
2579 |
\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave% save current master strut values |
2580 |
\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default |
2581 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise |
2582 |
\IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off |
2583 |
% no extra space unless the user specifically requests it |
2584 |
\lineskip=0pt\relax% |
2585 |
\lineskiplimit=0pt\relax% |
2586 |
\baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax% |
2587 |
\jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax% |
2588 |
\mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math |
2589 |
% the default end glues are zero for an \IEEEeqnarraybox |
2590 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default start glue |
2591 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default end glue |
2592 |
\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue |
2593 |
\@advanceIEEEeqncolcntfalse% do not advance the col counter for each col the user uses, |
2594 |
% used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build |
2595 |
\IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides |
2596 |
#1\relax% allow user to override defaults |
2597 |
\let\\\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr% replace newline with one that allows optional spacing |
2598 |
\@IEEEbuildpreamble #4\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA |
2599 |
% add an isolation column to the preamble to stop \\'s {} from getting into the last col |
2600 |
\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first |
2601 |
\toks0={##}% |
2602 |
% add the isolation column to the preamble |
2603 |
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}% |
2604 |
% set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build |
2605 |
\tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax |
2606 |
% begin the alignment |
2607 |
\everycr{}% |
2608 |
% use only the very first token to determine the positioning |
2609 |
% this stops some problems when the user uses more than one letter, |
2610 |
% but is probably not worth the effort |
2611 |
% \noindent is used as a delimiter |
2612 |
\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% |
2613 |
\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#2\relax\relax\noindent |
2614 |
% \@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded |
2615 |
% if we need to put things into and hbox and go into math mode, do so now |
2616 |
\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW \leavevmode \hbox \bgroup $\fi% |
2617 |
% use the appropriate vbox type |
2618 |
\if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken t\relax\vtop\else\if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken c\relax% |
2619 |
\vcenter\else\vbox\fi\fi\bgroup% |
2620 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines |
2621 |
\ifx#3\relax\halign\else\halign to #3\relax\fi% |
2622 |
\bgroup |
2623 |
% "exspand" the preamble |
2624 |
\span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr} |
2625 |
|
2626 |
% carry strut status and enter the isolation/strut column, |
2627 |
% exit from math mode if needed, and exit |
2628 |
\def\end@IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status |
2629 |
&% enter isolation/strut column |
2630 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed |
2631 |
\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore% restore the previous master strut values |
2632 |
% reset the strut system for next IEEEeqnarray |
2633 |
% (sets local strut values back to previous master strut values) |
2634 |
\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% |
2635 |
% ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox |
2636 |
\crcr\egroup\egroup% |
2637 |
% exit from math mode and close hbox if needed |
2638 |
\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW $\egroup\fi} |
2639 |
|
2640 |
|
2641 |
|
2642 |
% IEEEeqnarraybox uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to |
2643 |
% end rows. This allows for things like \\[vskip amount] |
2644 |
% This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray |
2645 |
% For IEEEeqnarraybox, \\* is the same as \\ |
2646 |
% the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid |
2647 |
% altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the isolation/strut column |
2648 |
% carry strut status into isolation/strut column |
2649 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status |
2650 |
&% enter isolation/strut column |
2651 |
\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed |
2652 |
% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray |
2653 |
\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% |
2654 |
{\ifnum0=`}\fi% |
2655 |
\@ifstar{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}} |
2656 |
|
2657 |
% test and setup the optional argument to \\[] |
2658 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR\z@skip} |
2659 |
|
2660 |
% IEEEeqnarraybox does not automatically increase line spacing by \jot |
2661 |
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}% |
2662 |
\cr\noalign{\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\else\vskip\jot\fi\vskip#1\relax}} |
2663 |
|
2664 |
|
2665 |
|
2666 |
% starts the halign preamble build |
2667 |
\def\@IEEEbuildpreamble{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register |
2668 |
\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=u%current column type is not yet known |
2669 |
\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=s%the previous column type was the start |
2670 |
\let\@IEEEBPnexttype=u%next column type is not yet known |
2671 |
% ensure these are valid |
2672 |
\def\@IEEEBPcurglue={0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt}% |
2673 |
\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}% name of current column definition |
2674 |
% currently acquired numerically referenced glue |
2675 |
% use a name that is easier to remember |
2676 |
\let\@IEEEBPcurnum=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA% |
2677 |
\@IEEEBPcurnum=0% |
2678 |
% tracks number of columns in the preamble |
2679 |
\@IEEEeqnnumcols=0% |
2680 |
% record the default end glues |
2681 |
\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart}% |
2682 |
\edef\@IEEEBPendglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend}% |
2683 |
% now parse the user's column specifications |
2684 |
\@@IEEEbuildpreamble} |
2685 |
|
2686 |
|
2687 |
% parses and builds the halign preamble |
2688 |
\def\@@IEEEbuildpreamble#1#2{\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEbuildpreamble% |
2689 |
% use only the very first token to check the end |
2690 |
% \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here |
2691 |
\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% |
2692 |
\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent |
2693 |
\ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEfinishpreamble\else% |
2694 |
% identify current and next token type |
2695 |
\@IEEEgetcoltype{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurtype}{1}% current, error on invalid |
2696 |
\@IEEEgetcoltype{#2}{\@IEEEBPnexttype}{0}% next, no error on invalid next |
2697 |
% if curtype is a glue, get the glue def |
2698 |
\if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEgetcurglue{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurglue}\fi% |
2699 |
% if curtype is a column, get the column def and set the current column name |
2700 |
\if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEgetcurcol{#1}\fi% |
2701 |
% if curtype is a numeral, acquire the user defined glue |
2702 |
\if\@IEEEBPcurtype n\@IEEEprocessNcol{#1}\fi% |
2703 |
% process the acquired glue |
2704 |
\if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEprocessGcol\fi% |
2705 |
% process the acquired col |
2706 |
\if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEprocessCcol\fi% |
2707 |
% ready prevtype for next col spec. |
2708 |
\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPcurtype% |
2709 |
% be sure and put back the future token(s) as a group |
2710 |
\fi\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble{#2}} |
2711 |
|
2712 |
|
2713 |
% executed just after preamble build is completed |
2714 |
% warn about zero cols, and if prevtype type = u, put in end tabskip glue |
2715 |
\def\@@IEEEfinishpreamble#1{\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols<1\relax |
2716 |
\@IEEEclspkgerror{No column specifiers declared for IEEEeqnarray}% |
2717 |
{At least one column type must be declared for each IEEEeqnarray.}% |
2718 |
\fi%num cols less than 1 |
2719 |
%if last type undefined, set default end tabskip glue |
2720 |
\if\@IEEEBPprevtype u\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue}\fi} |
2721 |
|
2722 |
|
2723 |
% Identify and return the column specifier's type code |
2724 |
\def\@IEEEgetcoltype#1#2#3{% |
2725 |
% use only the very first token to determine the type |
2726 |
% \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here |
2727 |
\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% |
2728 |
\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent |
2729 |
% \@IEEEgrabfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded |
2730 |
% n = number |
2731 |
% g = glue (any other char in catagory 12) |
2732 |
% c = letter |
2733 |
% e = \end |
2734 |
% u = undefined |
2735 |
% third argument: 0 = no error message, 1 = error on invalid char |
2736 |
\let#2=u\relax% assume invalid until know otherwise |
2737 |
\ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let#2=e\else |
2738 |
\ifcat\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\relax\else% screen out control sequences |
2739 |
\if0\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
2740 |
\if1\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
2741 |
\if2\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
2742 |
\if3\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
2743 |
\if4\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
2744 |
\if5\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
2745 |
\if6\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
2746 |
\if7\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
2747 |
\if8\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
2748 |
\if9\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
2749 |
\ifcat,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=g\relax |
2750 |
\else\ifcat a\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=c\relax\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi |
2751 |
\if#2u\relax |
2752 |
\if0\noexpand#3\relax\else\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid character in column specifications}% |
2753 |
{Only letters, numerals and certain other symbols are allowed \MessageBreak |
2754 |
as IEEEeqnarray column specifiers.}\fi\fi} |
2755 |
|
2756 |
|
2757 |
% identify the current letter referenced column |
2758 |
% if invalid, use a default column |
2759 |
\def\@IEEEgetcurcol#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined% |
2760 |
\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{#1}\else% invalid column name |
2761 |
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#1" in column specifications.\MessageBreak |
2762 |
Using a default centering column instead}% |
2763 |
{You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}% |
2764 |
\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}\fi} |
2765 |
|
2766 |
|
2767 |
% identify and return the predefined (punctuation) glue value |
2768 |
\def\@IEEEgetcurglue#1#2{% |
2769 |
% ! = \! (neg small) -0.16667em (-3/18 em) |
2770 |
% , = \, (small) 0.16667em ( 3/18 em) |
2771 |
% : = \: (med) 0.22222em ( 4/18 em) |
2772 |
% ; = \; (large) 0.27778em ( 5/18 em) |
2773 |
% ' = \quad 1em |
2774 |
% " = \qquad 2em |
2775 |
% . = 0.5\arraycolsep |
2776 |
% / = \arraycolsep |
2777 |
% ? = 2\arraycolsep |
2778 |
% * = 1fil |
2779 |
% + = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter |
2780 |
% - = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero |
2781 |
% Note that all em values are referenced to the math font (textfont2) fontdimen6 |
2782 |
% value for 1em. |
2783 |
% |
2784 |
% use only the very first token to determine the type |
2785 |
% this prevents errant tokens from getting in the main text |
2786 |
% \noindent is used as a delimiter here |
2787 |
\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% |
2788 |
\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent |
2789 |
% get the math font 1em value |
2790 |
% LaTeX2e's NFSS2 does not preload the fonts, but \IEEEeqnarray needs |
2791 |
% to gain access to the math (\textfont2) font's spacing parameters. |
2792 |
% So we create a bogus box here that uses the math font to ensure |
2793 |
% that \textfont2 is loaded and ready. If this is not done, |
2794 |
% the \textfont2 stuff here may not work. |
2795 |
% Thanks to Bernd Raichle for his 1997 post on this topic. |
2796 |
{\setbox0=\hbox{$\displaystyle\relax$}}% |
2797 |
% fontdimen6 has the width of 1em (a quad). |
2798 |
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\fontdimen6\textfont2\relax% |
2799 |
% identify the glue value based on the first token |
2800 |
% we discard anything after the first |
2801 |
\if!\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=-0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else |
2802 |
\if,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else |
2803 |
\if:\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.22222\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else |
2804 |
\if;\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.27778\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else |
2805 |
\if'\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else |
2806 |
\if"\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else |
2807 |
\if.\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.5\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else |
2808 |
\if/\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\the\arraycolsep}\else |
2809 |
\if?\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else |
2810 |
\if *\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{0pt plus 1fil minus 0pt}\else |
2811 |
\if+\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}\else |
2812 |
\if-\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}\else |
2813 |
\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% |
2814 |
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid predefined inter-column glue type "#1" in\MessageBreak |
2815 |
column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak |
2816 |
0pt instead}% |
2817 |
{Only !,:;'"./?*+ and - are valid predefined glue types in the\MessageBreak |
2818 |
IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} |
2819 |
|
2820 |
|
2821 |
|
2822 |
% process a numerical digit from the column specification |
2823 |
% and look up the corresponding user defined glue value |
2824 |
% can transform current type from n to g or a as the user defined glue is acquired |
2825 |
\def\@IEEEprocessNcol#1{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g% |
2826 |
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak |
2827 |
specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak |
2828 |
after the first}% |
2829 |
{You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak |
2830 |
in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}% |
2831 |
\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue, future digits will be discarded |
2832 |
\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax% |
2833 |
\else% if we previously aborted a glue |
2834 |
\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain digit abortion |
2835 |
\else%acquire this number |
2836 |
% save the previous type before the numerical digits started |
2837 |
\if\@IEEEBPprevtype n\else\let\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype=\@IEEEBPprevtype\fi% |
2838 |
\multiply\@IEEEBPcurnum by 10\relax% |
2839 |
\advance\@IEEEBPcurnum by #1\relax% add in number, \relax is needed to stop TeX's number scan |
2840 |
\if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else%close acquisition |
2841 |
\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined% |
2842 |
\edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname}% |
2843 |
\else%user glue not defined |
2844 |
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid user defined inter-column glue type "\number\@IEEEBPcurnum" in\MessageBreak |
2845 |
column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak |
2846 |
0pt instead}% |
2847 |
{You must define all IEEEeqnarray numerical inter-column glue types via\MessageBreak |
2848 |
\string\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep \space before they are used in column specifications.}% |
2849 |
\edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% |
2850 |
\fi% glue defined or not |
2851 |
\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=g% change the type to reflect the acquired glue |
2852 |
\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype% restore the prev type before this number glue |
2853 |
\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax%ready for next acquisition |
2854 |
\fi%close acquisition, get glue |
2855 |
\fi%discard or acquire number |
2856 |
\fi%prevtype glue or not |
2857 |
} |
2858 |
|
2859 |
|
2860 |
% process an acquired glue |
2861 |
% add any acquired column/glue pair to the preamble |
2862 |
\def\@IEEEprocessGcol{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain previous glue abortions |
2863 |
\else |
2864 |
% if this is the start glue, save it, but do nothing else |
2865 |
% as this is not used in the preamble, but before |
2866 |
\if\@IEEEBPprevtype s\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEBPcurglue}% |
2867 |
\else%not the start glue |
2868 |
\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g%ignore if back to back glues |
2869 |
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak |
2870 |
specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak |
2871 |
after the first}% |
2872 |
{You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak |
2873 |
in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}% |
2874 |
\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue |
2875 |
\else% not a back to back glue |
2876 |
\if\@IEEEBPprevtype c\relax% if the previoustype was a col, add column/glue pair to preamble |
2877 |
\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi |
2878 |
\toks0={##}% |
2879 |
% make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this |
2880 |
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi |
2881 |
% insert the column defintion into the preamble, being careful not to expand |
2882 |
% the column definition |
2883 |
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPcurglue}% |
2884 |
\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}% |
2885 |
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% |
2886 |
\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}% |
2887 |
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}% |
2888 |
\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% |
2889 |
\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}% |
2890 |
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% |
2891 |
\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% |
2892 |
\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}% |
2893 |
\advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble |
2894 |
\else% error: non-start glue with no pending column |
2895 |
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Inter-column glue specifier without a prior column\MessageBreak |
2896 |
type in the column specifications. Ignoring this glue\MessageBreak |
2897 |
specifier}% |
2898 |
{Except for the first and last positions, glue can be placed only\MessageBreak |
2899 |
between column types.}% |
2900 |
\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue |
2901 |
\fi% previous was a column |
2902 |
\fi% back-to-back glues |
2903 |
\fi% is start column glue |
2904 |
\fi% prev type not a |
2905 |
} |
2906 |
|
2907 |
|
2908 |
% process an acquired letter referenced column and, if necessary, add it to the preamble |
2909 |
\def\@IEEEprocessCcol{\if\@IEEEBPnexttype g\else |
2910 |
\if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else |
2911 |
% we have a column followed by something other than a glue (or numeral glue) |
2912 |
% so we must add this column to the preamble now |
2913 |
\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi%col separator for those after the first |
2914 |
\if\@IEEEBPnexttype e\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue\relax}\else%put in end glue |
2915 |
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid\relax}\fi% or default mid glue |
2916 |
\toks0={##}% |
2917 |
% make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this |
2918 |
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi |
2919 |
% insert the column definition into the preamble, being careful not to expand |
2920 |
% the column definition |
2921 |
\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}% |
2922 |
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% |
2923 |
\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}% |
2924 |
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}% |
2925 |
\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% |
2926 |
\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}% |
2927 |
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% |
2928 |
\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% |
2929 |
\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}% |
2930 |
\advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble |
2931 |
\fi%next type not numeral |
2932 |
\fi%next type not glue |
2933 |
} |
2934 |
|
2935 |
|
2936 |
%% |
2937 |
%% END OF IEEEeqnarry DEFINITIONS |
2938 |
%% |
2939 |
|
2940 |
|
2941 |
|
2942 |
|
2943 |
% set up the running headings, this complex because of all the different |
2944 |
% modes IEEEtran supports |
2945 |
\if@twoside |
2946 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote |
2947 |
\def\ps@headings{% |
2948 |
\def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage} |
2949 |
\def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}} |
2950 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls |
2951 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot |
2952 |
\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}% |
2953 |
\else |
2954 |
\def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize\@date\hfil DRAFT} |
2955 |
\def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil\@date} |
2956 |
\fi |
2957 |
\else |
2958 |
\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{} |
2959 |
\fi} |
2960 |
\else % not a technote |
2961 |
\def\ps@headings{% |
2962 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
2963 |
\def\@oddhead{} |
2964 |
\def\@evenhead{} |
2965 |
\else |
2966 |
\def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\rightmark \hfil \thepage} |
2967 |
\def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}} |
2968 |
\fi |
2969 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls |
2970 |
\def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\rightmark \hfil \thepage} |
2971 |
\def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}} |
2972 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot |
2973 |
\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}% |
2974 |
\else |
2975 |
\def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize\@date\hfil DRAFT} |
2976 |
\def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil\@date} |
2977 |
\fi |
2978 |
\else |
2979 |
\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}% |
2980 |
\fi} |
2981 |
\fi |
2982 |
\else % single side |
2983 |
\def\ps@headings{% |
2984 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
2985 |
\def\@oddhead{} |
2986 |
\def\@evenhead{} |
2987 |
\else |
2988 |
\def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage} |
2989 |
\def\@evenhead{} |
2990 |
\fi |
2991 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls |
2992 |
\def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage} |
2993 |
\def\@evenhead{} |
2994 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot |
2995 |
\def\@oddfoot{} |
2996 |
\else |
2997 |
\def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date \hfil DRAFT} |
2998 |
\fi |
2999 |
\else |
3000 |
\def\@oddfoot{} |
3001 |
\fi |
3002 |
\def\@evenfoot{}} |
3003 |
\fi |
3004 |
|
3005 |
|
3006 |
% title page style |
3007 |
\def\ps@IEEEtitlepagestyle{\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}% |
3008 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
3009 |
\def\@oddhead{}% |
3010 |
\def\@evenhead{}% |
3011 |
\else |
3012 |
\def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}% |
3013 |
\def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}% |
3014 |
\fi |
3015 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls |
3016 |
\def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}% |
3017 |
\def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}% |
3018 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else |
3019 |
\def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date\hfil DRAFT}% |
3020 |
\def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil \@date}% |
3021 |
\fi |
3022 |
\else |
3023 |
% all non-draft mode footers |
3024 |
\if@IEEEusingpubid |
3025 |
% for title pages that are using a pubid |
3026 |
% do not repeat pubid if using peer review option |
3027 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview |
3028 |
\else |
3029 |
\footskip 0pt% |
3030 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
3031 |
\def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% |
3032 |
\def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% |
3033 |
\else |
3034 |
\def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% |
3035 |
\def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% |
3036 |
\fi |
3037 |
\fi |
3038 |
\fi |
3039 |
\fi} |
3040 |
|
3041 |
|
3042 |
% peer review cover page style |
3043 |
\def\ps@IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle{% |
3044 |
\def\@oddhead{}\def\@evenhead{}% |
3045 |
\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}% |
3046 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls |
3047 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else |
3048 |
\def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date\hfil DRAFT}% |
3049 |
\def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil \@date}% |
3050 |
\fi |
3051 |
\else |
3052 |
% non-draft mode footers |
3053 |
\if@IEEEusingpubid |
3054 |
\footskip 0pt% |
3055 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
3056 |
\def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% |
3057 |
\def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% |
3058 |
\else |
3059 |
\def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% |
3060 |
\def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% |
3061 |
\fi |
3062 |
\fi |
3063 |
\fi} |
3064 |
|
3065 |
|
3066 |
% start with empty headings |
3067 |
\def\rightmark{}\def\leftmark{} |
3068 |
|
3069 |
|
3070 |
%% Defines the command for putting the header. \footernote{TEXT} is the same |
3071 |
%% as \markboth{TEXT}{TEXT}. |
3072 |
%% Note that all the text is forced into uppercase, if you have some text |
3073 |
%% that needs to be in lower case, for instance et. al., then either manually |
3074 |
%% set \leftmark and \rightmark or use \MakeLowercase{et. al.} within the |
3075 |
%% arguments to \markboth. |
3076 |
\def\markboth#1#2{\def\leftmark{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\MakeUppercase{#1}}% |
3077 |
\def\rightmark{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\MakeUppercase{#2}}} |
3078 |
\def\footernote#1{\markboth{#1}{#1}} |
3079 |
|
3080 |
\def\today{\ifcase\month\or |
3081 |
January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or |
3082 |
July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi |
3083 |
\space\number\day, \number\year} |
3084 |
|
3085 |
|
3086 |
|
3087 |
|
3088 |
%% CITATION AND BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMANDS |
3089 |
%% |
3090 |
%% V1.6 no longer supports the older, nonstandard \shortcite and \citename setup stuff |
3091 |
% |
3092 |
% |
3093 |
% Modify Latex2e \@citex to separate citations with "], [" |
3094 |
\def\@citex[#1]#2{% |
3095 |
\let\@citea\@empty |
3096 |
\@cite{\@for\@citeb:=#2\do |
3097 |
{\@citea\def\@citea{], [}% |
3098 |
\edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb\@empty}% |
3099 |
\if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi |
3100 |
\@ifundefined{b@\@citeb}{\mbox{\reset@font\bfseries ?}% |
3101 |
\G@refundefinedtrue |
3102 |
\@latex@warning |
3103 |
{Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage \space undefined}}% |
3104 |
{\hbox{\csname b@\@citeb\endcsname}}}}{#1}} |
3105 |
|
3106 |
% V1.6 we create hooks for the optional use of Donald Arseneau's |
3107 |
% cite.sty package. cite.sty is "smart" and will notice that the |
3108 |
% following format controls are already defined and will not |
3109 |
% redefine them. The result will be the proper sorting of the |
3110 |
% citation numbers and auto detection of 3 or more entry "ranges" - |
3111 |
% all in IEEE style: [1], [2], [5]--[7], [12] |
3112 |
% This also allows for an optional note, i.e., \cite[mynote]{..}. |
3113 |
% If the \cite with note has more than one reference, the note will |
3114 |
% be applied to the last of the listed references. It is generally |
3115 |
% desired that if a note is given, only one reference is listed in |
3116 |
% that \cite. |
3117 |
% Thanks to Mr. Arseneau for providing the required format arguments |
3118 |
% to produce the IEEE style. |
3119 |
\def\citepunct{], [} |
3120 |
\def\citedash{]--[} |
3121 |
|
3122 |
% V1.7 default to using same font for urls made by url.sty |
3123 |
\AtBeginDocument{\csname url@samestyle\endcsname} |
3124 |
|
3125 |
% V1.6 class files should always provide these |
3126 |
\def\newblock{\hskip .11em\@plus.33em\@minus.07em} |
3127 |
\let\@openbib@code\@empty |
3128 |
|
3129 |
|
3130 |
% Provide support for the control entries of IEEEtran.bst V1.00 and later. |
3131 |
% V1.7 optional argument allows for a different aux file to be specified in |
3132 |
% order to handle multiple bibliographies. For example, with multibib.sty: |
3133 |
% \newcites{sec}{Secondary Literature} |
3134 |
% \bstctlcite[@auxoutsec]{BSTcontrolhak} |
3135 |
\def\bstctlcite{\@ifnextchar[{\@bstctlcite}{\@bstctlcite[@auxout]}} |
3136 |
\def\@bstctlcite[#1]#2{\@bsphack |
3137 |
\@for\@citeb:=#2\do{% |
3138 |
\edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}% |
3139 |
\if@filesw\immediate\write\csname #1\endcsname{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi}% |
3140 |
\@esphack} |
3141 |
|
3142 |
% V1.6 provide a way for a user to execute a command just before |
3143 |
% a given reference number - used to insert a \newpage to balance |
3144 |
% the columns on the last page |
3145 |
\edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{0} % the default of zero means that |
3146 |
% the command is not executed |
3147 |
\def\@IEEEtriggercmd{\newpage} |
3148 |
|
3149 |
% allow the user to alter the triggered command |
3150 |
\long\def\IEEEtriggercmd#1{\long\def\@IEEEtriggercmd{#1}} |
3151 |
|
3152 |
% allow user a way to specify the reference number just before the |
3153 |
% command is executed |
3154 |
\def\IEEEtriggeratref#1{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=#1% |
3155 |
\edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA}}% |
3156 |
|
3157 |
% trigger command at the given reference |
3158 |
\def\@IEEEbibitemprefix{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtriggerrefnum\relax% |
3159 |
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax% |
3160 |
\ifnum\c@enumiv=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax\@IEEEtriggercmd\relax\fi} |
3161 |
|
3162 |
|
3163 |
\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]} |
3164 |
|
3165 |
% compsoc journals left align the reference numbers |
3166 |
\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]\hfill}} |
3167 |
|
3168 |
% controls bib item spacing |
3169 |
\def\IEEEbibitemsep{2.5pt plus .5pt} |
3170 |
|
3171 |
\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\IEEEbibitemsep{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}} |
3172 |
|
3173 |
|
3174 |
\def\thebibliography#1{\section*{\refname}% |
3175 |
\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\refname}% |
3176 |
% V1.6 add some rubber space here and provide a command trigger |
3177 |
\footnotesize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\small}\vskip 0.3\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip% |
3178 |
\list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% |
3179 |
{\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}% |
3180 |
\leftmargin\labelwidth |
3181 |
\labelsep 1em |
3182 |
\advance\leftmargin\labelsep\relax |
3183 |
\itemsep \IEEEbibitemsep\relax |
3184 |
\usecounter{enumiv}% |
3185 |
\let\p@enumiv\@empty |
3186 |
\renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% |
3187 |
\let\@IEEElatexbibitem\bibitem% |
3188 |
\def\bibitem{\@IEEEbibitemprefix\@IEEElatexbibitem}% |
3189 |
\def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em}% |
3190 |
% originally: |
3191 |
% \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000% |
3192 |
% by adding the \interlinepenalty here, we make it more |
3193 |
% difficult, but not impossible, for LaTeX to break within a reference. |
3194 |
% IEEE almost never breaks a reference (but they do it more often with |
3195 |
% technotes). You may get an underfull vbox warning around the bibliography, |
3196 |
% but the final result will be much more like what IEEE will publish. |
3197 |
% MDS 11/2000 |
3198 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty100% |
3199 |
\else\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty500\fi% |
3200 |
\sfcode`\.=1000\relax} |
3201 |
\let\endthebibliography=\endlist |
3202 |
|
3203 |
|
3204 |
|
3205 |
|
3206 |
% TITLE PAGE COMMANDS |
3207 |
% |
3208 |
% |
3209 |
% \IEEEmembership is used to produce the sublargesize italic font used to indicate author |
3210 |
% IEEE membership. compsoc uses a large size sans slant font |
3211 |
\def\IEEEmembership#1{{\@IEEEnotcompsoconly{\sublargesize}\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\textit{#1}}} |
3212 |
|
3213 |
|
3214 |
% \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a footnote type symbol to indicate author affiliation. |
3215 |
% When given an argument of 1 to 9, \IEEEauthorrefmark{} follows the standard LaTeX footnote |
3216 |
% symbol sequence convention. However, for arguments 10 and above, \IEEEauthorrefmark{} |
3217 |
% reverts to using lower case roman numerals, so it cannot overflow. Do note that you |
3218 |
% cannot use \footnotemark[] in place of \IEEEauthorrefmark{} within \author as the footnote |
3219 |
% symbols will have been turned off to prevent \thanks from creating footnote marks. |
3220 |
% \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a symbol that appears to LaTeX as having zero vertical |
3221 |
% height - this allows for a more compact line packing, but the user must ensure that |
3222 |
% the interline spacing is large enough to prevent \IEEEauthorrefmark{} from colliding |
3223 |
% with the text above. |
3224 |
% V1.7 make this a robust command |
3225 |
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEauthorrefmark}[1]{\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\textsuperscript{\footnotesize\ensuremath{\ifcase#1\or *\or \dagger\or \ddagger\or% |
3226 |
\mathsection\or \mathparagraph\or \|\or **\or \dagger\dagger% |
3227 |
\or \ddagger\ddagger \else\textsuperscript{\expandafter\romannumeral#1}\fi}}}} |
3228 |
|
3229 |
|
3230 |
% FONT CONTROLS AND SPACINGS FOR CONFERENCE MODE AUTHOR NAME AND AFFILIATION BLOCKS |
3231 |
% |
3232 |
% The default font styles for the author name and affiliation blocks (confmode) |
3233 |
\def\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\large}} |
3234 |
\def\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\itshape}\normalsize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\large}} |
3235 |
% The default if the user does not use an author block |
3236 |
\def\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize} |
3237 |
|
3238 |
% spacing from title (or special paper notice) to author name blocks (confmode) |
3239 |
% can be negative |
3240 |
\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{-0.25em} |
3241 |
% compsoc conferences need more space here |
3242 |
\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{0.75\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}} |
3243 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{20pt}\fi |
3244 |
|
3245 |
% spacing between name and affiliation blocks (confmode) |
3246 |
% This can be negative. |
3247 |
% IEEE doesn't want any added spacing here, but I will leave these |
3248 |
% controls in place in case they ever change their mind. |
3249 |
% Personally, I like 0.75ex. |
3250 |
%\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.75ex} |
3251 |
%\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.75ex} |
3252 |
\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.0ex} |
3253 |
\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.0ex} |
3254 |
% baseline spacing within name and affiliation blocks (confmode) |
3255 |
% must be positive, spacings below certain values will make |
3256 |
% the position of line of text sensitive to the contents of the |
3257 |
% line above it i.e., whether or not the prior line has descenders, |
3258 |
% subscripts, etc. For this reason it is a good idea to keep |
3259 |
% these above 2.6ex |
3260 |
\def\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace{2.6ex} |
3261 |
\def\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace{2.75ex} |
3262 |
|
3263 |
% This tracks the required strut size. |
3264 |
% See the \@IEEEauthorhalign command for the actual default value used. |
3265 |
\def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex} |
3266 |
|
3267 |
% variables to retain font size and style across groups |
3268 |
% values given here have no effect as they will be overwritten later |
3269 |
\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize{10} |
3270 |
\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip{12} |
3271 |
\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding{OT1} |
3272 |
\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily{ptm} |
3273 |
\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries{m} |
3274 |
\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape{n} |
3275 |
|
3276 |
% saves the current font attributes |
3277 |
\def\@IEEEcurfontSAVE{\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize\f@size% |
3278 |
\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip\f@baselineskip% |
3279 |
\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding\f@encoding% |
3280 |
\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily\f@family% |
3281 |
\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries\f@series% |
3282 |
\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape\f@shape} |
3283 |
|
3284 |
% restores the saved font attributes |
3285 |
\def\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE{\fontsize{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize}{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip}% |
3286 |
\fontencoding{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding}% |
3287 |
\fontfamily{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily}% |
3288 |
\fontseries{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries}% |
3289 |
\fontshape{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape}% |
3290 |
\selectfont} |
3291 |
|
3292 |
|
3293 |
% variable to indicate if the current block is the first block in the column |
3294 |
\newif\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse |
3295 |
|
3296 |
|
3297 |
% the command places a strut with height and depth = \@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace |
3298 |
% we use this technique to have complete manual control over the spacing of the lines |
3299 |
% within the halign environment. |
3300 |
% We set the below baseline portion at 30%, the above |
3301 |
% baseline portion at 70% of the total length. |
3302 |
% Responds to changes in the document's \baselinestretch |
3303 |
\def\@IEEEauthorstrutrule{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace% |
3304 |
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselinestretch\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% |
3305 |
\rule[-0.3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA]{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}} |
3306 |
|
3307 |
|
3308 |
% blocks to hold the authors' names and affilations. |
3309 |
% Makes formatting easy for conferences |
3310 |
% |
3311 |
% use real definitions in conference mode |
3312 |
% name block |
3313 |
\def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle% set the default text style |
3314 |
\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}% disable strut for spacer row |
3315 |
% the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs |
3316 |
% for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro |
3317 |
% do a spacer row if needed |
3318 |
\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline\fi |
3319 |
\global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column |
3320 |
%restore the correct strut value |
3321 |
\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace}% |
3322 |
% input the author names |
3323 |
#1% |
3324 |
% end the row if the user did not already |
3325 |
\crcr} |
3326 |
% spacer row for names |
3327 |
\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace}} |
3328 |
% |
3329 |
% affiliation block |
3330 |
\def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle% set the default text style |
3331 |
\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}%disable strut for spacer row |
3332 |
% the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs |
3333 |
% for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro |
3334 |
% do a spacer row if needed |
3335 |
\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline\fi |
3336 |
\global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column |
3337 |
%restore the correct strut value |
3338 |
\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace}% |
3339 |
% input the author affiliations |
3340 |
#1% |
3341 |
% end the row if the user did not already |
3342 |
\crcr} |
3343 |
% spacer row for affiliations |
3344 |
\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace}} |
3345 |
|
3346 |
|
3347 |
% allow papers to compile even if author blocks are used in modes other |
3348 |
% than conference or peerreviewca. For such cases, we provide dummy blocks. |
3349 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
3350 |
\else |
3351 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca\else |
3352 |
% not conference or peerreviewca mode |
3353 |
\def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{#1}% |
3354 |
\def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{#1}% |
3355 |
\fi |
3356 |
\fi |
3357 |
|
3358 |
|
3359 |
|
3360 |
% we provide our own halign so as not to have to depend on tabular |
3361 |
\def\@IEEEauthorhalign{\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle% default text style |
3362 |
\lineskip=0pt\relax% disable line spacing |
3363 |
\lineskiplimit=0pt\relax% |
3364 |
\baselineskip=0pt\relax% |
3365 |
\@IEEEcurfontSAVE% save the current font |
3366 |
\mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math |
3367 |
\let\\\@IEEEauthorhaligncr% replace newline with halign friendly one |
3368 |
\tabskip=0pt\relax% no column spacing |
3369 |
\everycr{}% ensure no problems here |
3370 |
\@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse% no author blocks yet |
3371 |
\def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex}% default interline space |
3372 |
\vtop\bgroup%vtop box |
3373 |
\halign\bgroup&\relax\hfil\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE\relax ##\relax |
3374 |
\hfil\@IEEEcurfontSAVE\@IEEEauthorstrutrule\cr} |
3375 |
|
3376 |
% ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox |
3377 |
\def\end@IEEEauthorhalign{\crcr\egroup\egroup} |
3378 |
|
3379 |
% handle bogus star form |
3380 |
\def\@IEEEauthorhaligncr{{\ifnum0=`}\fi\@ifstar{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}} |
3381 |
|
3382 |
% test and setup the optional argument to \\[] |
3383 |
\def\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr{\@testopt\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr\z@skip} |
3384 |
|
3385 |
% end the line and do the optional spacer |
3386 |
\def\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}\cr\noalign{\vskip#1\relax}} |
3387 |
|
3388 |
|
3389 |
|
3390 |
% flag to prevent multiple \and warning messages |
3391 |
\newif\if@IEEEWARNand |
3392 |
\@IEEEWARNandtrue |
3393 |
|
3394 |
% if in conference or peerreviewca modes, we support the use of \and as \author is a |
3395 |
% tabular environment, otherwise we warn the user that \and is invalid |
3396 |
% outside of conference or peerreviewca modes. |
3397 |
\def\and{\relax} % provide a bogus \and that we will then override |
3398 |
|
3399 |
\renewcommand{\and}[1][\relax]{\if@IEEEWARNand\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\and is valid only |
3400 |
when in conference or peerreviewca}\typeout{modes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNandfalse} |
3401 |
|
3402 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% |
3403 |
\renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}% |
3404 |
\fi |
3405 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca |
3406 |
\renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}% |
3407 |
\fi |
3408 |
|
3409 |
|
3410 |
% page clearing command |
3411 |
% based on LaTeX2e's \cleardoublepage, but allows different page styles |
3412 |
% for the inserted blank pages |
3413 |
\def\@IEEEcleardoublepage#1{\clearpage\if@twoside\ifodd\c@page\else |
3414 |
\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\fi\fi\fi} |
3415 |
|
3416 |
|
3417 |
% user command to invoke the title page |
3418 |
\def\maketitle{\par% |
3419 |
\begingroup% |
3420 |
\normalfont% |
3421 |
\def\thefootnote{}% the \thanks{} mark type is empty |
3422 |
\def\footnotemark{}% and kill space from \thanks within author |
3423 |
\let\@makefnmark\relax% V1.7, must *really* kill footnotemark to remove all \textsuperscript spacing as well. |
3424 |
\footnotesize% equal spacing between thanks lines |
3425 |
\footnotesep 0.7\baselineskip%see global setting of \footnotesep for more info |
3426 |
% V1.7 disable \thanks note indention for compsoc |
3427 |
\@IEEEcompsoconly{\long\def\@makefntext##1{\parindent 1em\noindent\hbox{\@makefnmark}##1}}% |
3428 |
\normalsize% |
3429 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview |
3430 |
\newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext% |
3431 |
\thispagestyle{IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle}\@thanks% |
3432 |
\else |
3433 |
\if@twocolumn% |
3434 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% |
3435 |
\newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext% |
3436 |
\else |
3437 |
\twocolumn[\@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext]% |
3438 |
\fi |
3439 |
\else |
3440 |
\newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext% |
3441 |
\fi |
3442 |
\thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}\@thanks% |
3443 |
\fi |
3444 |
% pullup page for pubid if used. |
3445 |
\if@IEEEusingpubid |
3446 |
\enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}% |
3447 |
\fi |
3448 |
\endgroup |
3449 |
\setcounter{footnote}{0}\let\maketitle\relax\let\@maketitle\relax |
3450 |
\gdef\@thanks{}% |
3451 |
% v1.6b do not clear these as we will need the title again for peer review papers |
3452 |
% \gdef\@author{}\gdef\@title{}% |
3453 |
\let\thanks\relax} |
3454 |
|
3455 |
|
3456 |
|
3457 |
% V1.7 parbox to format \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext |
3458 |
\long\def\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox#1{\parbox{0.915\textwidth}{#1}} |
3459 |
|
3460 |
% formats the Title, authors names, affiliations and special paper notice |
3461 |
% THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING COMMAND! Do not allow blank lines or unintentional |
3462 |
% spaces to enter the definition - use % at the end of each line |
3463 |
\def\@maketitle{\newpage |
3464 |
\begingroup\centering |
3465 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technotes |
3466 |
{\bfseries\large\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@title\par}\vskip 1.3em{\lineskip .5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@author |
3467 |
\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax |
3468 |
\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par |
3469 |
\hfill\@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax |
3470 |
\else% not a technote |
3471 |
\vskip0.2em{\Huge\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\normalfont\normalsize\vskip 2\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip |
3472 |
\bfseries\Large}\@title\par}\vskip1.0em\par% |
3473 |
% V1.6 handle \author differently if in conference mode |
3474 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% |
3475 |
{\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace% |
3476 |
\mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par}\relax |
3477 |
\else% peerreviewca, peerreview or journal |
3478 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca |
3479 |
% peerreviewca handles author names just like conference mode |
3480 |
{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace% |
3481 |
\mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par |
3482 |
{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax |
3483 |
\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par\hfill |
3484 |
\@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax |
3485 |
\else% journal or peerreview |
3486 |
{\lineskip.5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@author\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par |
3487 |
{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax |
3488 |
\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par\hfill |
3489 |
\@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax |
3490 |
\fi |
3491 |
\fi |
3492 |
\fi\par\endgroup} |
3493 |
|
3494 |
|
3495 |
|
3496 |
% V1.7 Computer Society "diamond line" which follows index terms for nonconference papers |
3497 |
\def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondline{\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\hspace{7.5pt}% |
3498 |
\raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}% |
3499 |
\hspace{7.5pt}\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\relax} |
3500 |
|
3501 |
% V1.7 standard LateX2e \thanks, but with \itshape under compsoc. Also make it a \long\def |
3502 |
% We also need to trigger the one-shot footnote rule |
3503 |
\def\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule{\global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoteruletrue} |
3504 |
|
3505 |
|
3506 |
\long\def\thanks#1{\footnotemark |
3507 |
\protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks |
3508 |
\protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\itshape |
3509 |
\protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule\relax}\ignorespaces#1}}} |
3510 |
\let\@thanks\@empty |
3511 |
|
3512 |
% V1.7 allow \author to contain \par's. This is needed to allow \thanks to contain \par. |
3513 |
\long\def\author#1{\gdef\@author{#1}} |
3514 |
|
3515 |
|
3516 |
% in addition to setting up IEEEitemize, we need to remove a baselineskip space above and |
3517 |
% below it because \list's \pars introduce blank lines because of the footnote struts. |
3518 |
\def\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist{\def\labelitemi{$\bullet$}% |
3519 |
\setlength{\IEEElabelindent}{0pt}\setlength{\parskip}{0pt}% |
3520 |
\setlength{\partopsep}{0pt}\setlength{\topsep}{0.5\baselineskip}\vspace{-1\baselineskip}\relax} |
3521 |
|
3522 |
|
3523 |
% flag for fake non-compsoc \IEEEcompsocthanksitem - prevents line break on very first item |
3524 |
\newif\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem \@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse |
3525 |
|
3526 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
3527 |
% V1.7 compsoc bullet item \thanks |
3528 |
% also, we need to redefine this to destroy the argument in \@IEEEdynamictitlevspace |
3529 |
\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\relax\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse\footnotemark |
3530 |
\protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks |
3531 |
\protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\itshape\protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule |
3532 |
{\let\IEEEiedlistdecl\relax\protect\begin{IEEEitemize}[\protect\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist]\ignorespaces#1\relax |
3533 |
\protect\end{IEEEitemize}}\protect\vspace{-1\baselineskip}}}} |
3534 |
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\item} |
3535 |
\else |
3536 |
% non-compsoc, allow for dual compilation via rerouting to normal \thanks |
3537 |
\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\thanks{#1}} |
3538 |
% redirect to "pseudo-par" \hfil\break\indent after swallowing [] from \IEEEcompsocthanksitem[] |
3539 |
\DeclareRobustCommand{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg}% |
3540 |
{\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[\relax]}} |
3541 |
% be sure and break only after first item, be sure and ignore spaces after optional argument |
3542 |
\def\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[#1]{\relax\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem\hfil\break |
3543 |
\indent\fi\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemtrue\ignorespaces} |
3544 |
\fi |
3545 |
|
3546 |
|
3547 |
% V1.6b define the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle as needed |
3548 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview |
3549 |
\def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\@IEEEcleardoublepage{empty}% |
3550 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn |
3551 |
\twocolumn[\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace] |
3552 |
\else |
3553 |
\newpage\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip |
3554 |
\fi |
3555 |
\thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}} |
3556 |
\else |
3557 |
% \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle does nothing if peer review option has not been selected |
3558 |
\def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\relax} |
3559 |
\fi |
3560 |
|
3561 |
% peerreview formats the repeated title like the title in journal papers. |
3562 |
\def\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\begin{center}\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}% |
3563 |
\normalfont\normalsize\vskip0.2em{\Huge\@title\par}\vskip1.0em\par |
3564 |
\end{center}} |
3565 |
|
3566 |
|
3567 |
|
3568 |
% V1.6 |
3569 |
% this is a static rubber spacer between the title/authors and the main text |
3570 |
% used for single column text, or when the title appears in the first column |
3571 |
% of two column text (technotes). |
3572 |
\def\@IEEEstatictitlevskip{{\normalfont\normalsize |
3573 |
% adjust spacing to next text |
3574 |
% v1.6b handle peer review papers |
3575 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview |
3576 |
% for peer review papers, the same value is used for both title pages |
3577 |
% regardless of the other paper modes |
3578 |
\vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip |
3579 |
\else |
3580 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% conference |
3581 |
\vskip 0.6\baselineskip |
3582 |
\else% |
3583 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technote |
3584 |
\vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip% |
3585 |
\else% journal uses more space |
3586 |
\vskip 2.5\baselineskip plus 0.75\baselineskip minus 0.375\baselineskip% |
3587 |
\fi |
3588 |
\fi |
3589 |
\fi}} |
3590 |
|
3591 |
|
3592 |
% V1.6 |
3593 |
% This is a dynamically determined rigid spacer between the title/authors |
3594 |
% and the main text. This is used only for single column titles over two |
3595 |
% column text (most common) |
3596 |
% This is bit tricky because we have to ensure that the textheight of the |
3597 |
% main text is an integer multiple of \baselineskip |
3598 |
% otherwise underfull vbox problems may develop in the second column of the |
3599 |
% text on the titlepage |
3600 |
% The possible use of \IEEEpubid must also be taken into account. |
3601 |
\def\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace{{% |
3602 |
% we run within a group so that all the macros can be forgotten when we are done |
3603 |
\long\def\thanks##1{\relax}%don't allow \thanks to run when we evaluate the vbox height |
3604 |
\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks##1{\relax}%don't allow \IEEEcompsocitemizethanks to run when we evaluate the vbox height |
3605 |
\normalfont\normalsize% we declare more descriptive variable names |
3606 |
\let\@IEEEmaintextheight=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%height of the main text columns |
3607 |
\let\@IEEEINTmaintextheight=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%height of the main text columns with integer # lines |
3608 |
% set the nominal and minimum values for the title spacer |
3609 |
% the dynamic algorithm will not allow the spacer size to |
3610 |
% become less than \@IEEEMINtitlevspace - instead it will be |
3611 |
% lengthened |
3612 |
% default to journal values |
3613 |
\def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{2.5\baselineskip}% |
3614 |
\def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{2\baselineskip}% |
3615 |
% conferences and technotes need tighter spacing |
3616 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference%conference |
3617 |
\def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}% |
3618 |
\def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}% |
3619 |
\fi |
3620 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%technote |
3621 |
\def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}% |
3622 |
\def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}% |
3623 |
\fi% |
3624 |
% get the height that the title will take up |
3625 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview |
3626 |
\settoheight{\@IEEEmaintextheight}{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth \@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle}}% |
3627 |
\else |
3628 |
\settoheight{\@IEEEmaintextheight}{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth \@maketitle}}% |
3629 |
\fi |
3630 |
\@IEEEmaintextheight=-\@IEEEmaintextheight% title takes away from maintext, so reverse sign |
3631 |
% add the height of the page textheight |
3632 |
\advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by \textheight% |
3633 |
% correct for title pages using pubid |
3634 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else |
3635 |
% peerreview papers use the pubid on the cover page only. |
3636 |
% And the cover page uses a static spacer. |
3637 |
\if@IEEEusingpubid\advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\@IEEEpubidpullup\fi |
3638 |
\fi% |
3639 |
% subtract off the nominal value of the title bottom spacer |
3640 |
\advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\@IEEENORMtitlevspace% |
3641 |
% \topskip takes away some too |
3642 |
\advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\topskip% |
3643 |
% calculate the column height of the main text for lines |
3644 |
% now we calculate the main text height as if holding |
3645 |
% an integer number of \normalsize lines after the first |
3646 |
% and discard any excess fractional remainder |
3647 |
% we subtracted the first line, because the first line |
3648 |
% is placed \topskip into the maintext, not \baselineskip like the |
3649 |
% rest of the lines. |
3650 |
\@IEEEINTmaintextheight=\@IEEEmaintextheight% |
3651 |
\divide\@IEEEINTmaintextheight by \baselineskip% |
3652 |
\multiply\@IEEEINTmaintextheight by \baselineskip% |
3653 |
% now we calculate how much the title spacer height will |
3654 |
% have to be reduced from nominal (\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight is always |
3655 |
% a positive value) so that the maintext area will contain an integer |
3656 |
% number of normal size lines |
3657 |
% we change variable names here (to avoid confusion) as we no longer |
3658 |
% need \@IEEEINTmaintextheight and can reuse its dimen register |
3659 |
\let\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight=\@IEEEINTmaintextheight% |
3660 |
\advance\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight by -\@IEEEmaintextheight% |
3661 |
\advance\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight by \baselineskip% |
3662 |
% this is the calculated height of the spacer |
3663 |
% we change variable names here (to avoid confusion) as we no longer |
3664 |
% need \@IEEEmaintextheight and can reuse its dimen register |
3665 |
\let\@IEEECOMPENSATElen=\@IEEEmaintextheight% |
3666 |
\@IEEECOMPENSATElen=\@IEEENORMtitlevspace% set the nominal value |
3667 |
% we go with the reduced length if it is smaller than an increase |
3668 |
\ifdim\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight < 0.5\baselineskip\relax% |
3669 |
\advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by -\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight% |
3670 |
% if the resulting spacer is too small back out and go with an increase instead |
3671 |
\ifdim\@IEEECOMPENSATElen<\@IEEEMINtitlevspace\relax% |
3672 |
\advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by \baselineskip% |
3673 |
\fi% |
3674 |
\else% |
3675 |
% go with an increase because it is closer to the nominal than a decrease |
3676 |
\advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by -\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight% |
3677 |
\advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by \baselineskip% |
3678 |
\fi% |
3679 |
% set the calculated rigid spacer |
3680 |
\vspace{\@IEEECOMPENSATElen}}} |
3681 |
|
3682 |
|
3683 |
|
3684 |
% V1.6 |
3685 |
% we allow the user access to the last part of the title area |
3686 |
% useful in emergencies such as when a different spacing is needed |
3687 |
% This text is NOT compensated for in the dynamic sizer. |
3688 |
\let\@IEEEaftertitletext=\relax |
3689 |
\long\def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\def\@IEEEaftertitletext{#1}} |
3690 |
|
3691 |
% V1.7 provide a way for users to enter abstract and keywords |
3692 |
% into the onecolumn title are. This text is compensated for |
3693 |
% in the dynamic sizer. |
3694 |
\let\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext=\relax |
3695 |
\long\def\IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext#1{\def\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext{#1}} |
3696 |
% V1.7 provide a way for users to get the \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext if |
3697 |
% not in compsoc journal mode - this way abstract and keywords can be placed |
3698 |
% in their conventional position if not in compsoc mode. |
3699 |
\def\IEEEdisplaynotcompsoctitleabstractindextext{% |
3700 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc% display if compsoc conf |
3701 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext\fi |
3702 |
\else% or if not compsoc |
3703 |
\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext\fi} |
3704 |
|
3705 |
|
3706 |
% command to allow alteration of baselinestretch, but only if the current |
3707 |
% baselineskip is unity. Used to tweak the compsoc abstract and keywords line spacing. |
3708 |
\def\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch#1{{\def\baselinestretch{1}\selectfont |
3709 |
\global\@tempskipa\baselineskip}\ifnum\@tempskipa=\baselineskip% |
3710 |
\def\baselinestretch{#1}\selectfont\fi\relax} |
3711 |
|
3712 |
|
3713 |
% abstract and keywords are in \small, except |
3714 |
% for 9pt docs in which they are in \footnotesize |
3715 |
% Because 9pt docs use an 8pt footnotesize, \small |
3716 |
% becomes a rather awkward 8.5pt |
3717 |
\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\small} |
3718 |
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine |
3719 |
\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize} |
3720 |
\fi |
3721 |
|
3722 |
% compsoc journals use \footnotesize, compsoc conferences use normalsize |
3723 |
\@IEEEcompsoconly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize}} |
3724 |
\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\normalsize}} |
3725 |
|
3726 |
|
3727 |
|
3728 |
|
3729 |
% V1.6 have abstract and keywords strip leading spaces, pars and newlines |
3730 |
% so that spacing is more tightly controlled. |
3731 |
\def\abstract{\normalfont |
3732 |
\if@twocolumn |
3733 |
\par\@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\leavevmode\kern-1pt\textit{\abstractname}---\relax |
3734 |
\else |
3735 |
\begin{center}\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize |
3736 |
\fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} |
3737 |
% V1.6 IEEE wants only 1 pica from end of abstract to introduction heading when in |
3738 |
% conference mode (the heading already has this much above it) |
3739 |
\def\endabstract{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\vspace{0ex}\else\vspace{1.34ex}\fi\par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi |
3740 |
\normalfont\normalsize} |
3741 |
|
3742 |
\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont |
3743 |
\if@twocolumn |
3744 |
\@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\leavevmode\kern-1pt\textit{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax |
3745 |
\else |
3746 |
\begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize |
3747 |
\fi\itshape\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} |
3748 |
\def\endIEEEkeywords{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\vspace{1.34ex}\else\vspace{0.5ex}\fi |
3749 |
\par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi% |
3750 |
\normalfont\normalsize} |
3751 |
|
3752 |
% V1.7 compsoc keywords index terms |
3753 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
3754 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference |
3755 |
\def\abstract{\normalfont |
3756 |
\begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\large\abstractname}\end{center}\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip |
3757 |
\if@twocolumn\else\quotation\fi\itshape\@IEEEabskeysecsize% |
3758 |
\par\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} |
3759 |
\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\vskip 1.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip |
3760 |
\begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\large\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip |
3761 |
\if@twocolumn\else\quotation\fi\itshape\@IEEEabskeysecsize% |
3762 |
\par\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} |
3763 |
\else% compsoc not conference |
3764 |
\def\abstract{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily |
3765 |
\if@twocolumn |
3766 |
\@IEEEabskeysecsize\noindent\textbf{\abstractname}---\relax |
3767 |
\else |
3768 |
\begin{center}\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize% |
3769 |
\fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} |
3770 |
\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily |
3771 |
\if@twocolumn |
3772 |
\@IEEEabskeysecsize\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip\noindent |
3773 |
\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax |
3774 |
\else |
3775 |
\begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize% |
3776 |
\fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} |
3777 |
\fi |
3778 |
\fi |
3779 |
|
3780 |
|
3781 |
|
3782 |
% gobbles all leading \, \\ and \par, upon finding first token that |
3783 |
% is not a \ , \\ or a \par, it ceases and returns that token |
3784 |
% |
3785 |
% used to strip leading \, \\ and \par from the input |
3786 |
% so that such things in the beginning of an environment will not |
3787 |
% affect the formatting of the text |
3788 |
\long\def\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP#1{\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=0% |
3789 |
\let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken#1% |
3790 |
\let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken=\par% |
3791 |
\let\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken=\\% |
3792 |
\let\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken=\ % |
3793 |
\def\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO{\ }% |
3794 |
\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken% |
3795 |
\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% |
3796 |
\fi% |
3797 |
\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken% |
3798 |
\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% |
3799 |
\fi% |
3800 |
\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken% |
3801 |
\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% |
3802 |
\fi% |
3803 |
% a control space will come in as a macro |
3804 |
% when it is the last one on a line |
3805 |
\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO% |
3806 |
\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% |
3807 |
\fi% |
3808 |
% if we have to swallow this token, do so and taste the next one |
3809 |
% else spit it out and stop gobbling |
3810 |
\ifx\@IEEEswallowthistoken 1\let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP\else% |
3811 |
\let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=#1\fi% |
3812 |
\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP}% |
3813 |
|
3814 |
|
3815 |
|
3816 |
|
3817 |
% TITLING OF SECTIONS |
3818 |
\def\@IEEEsectpunct{:\ \,} % Punctuation after run-in section heading (headings which are |
3819 |
% part of the paragraphs), need little bit more than a single space |
3820 |
% spacing from section number to title |
3821 |
% compsoc conferences use regular period/space punctuation |
3822 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
3823 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
3824 |
\def\@IEEEsectpunct{.\ } |
3825 |
\fi\fi |
3826 |
|
3827 |
\def\@seccntformat#1{\hb@xt@ 1.4em{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hss\relax}} |
3828 |
\def\@seccntformatinl#1{\hb@xt@ 1.1em{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hss\relax}} |
3829 |
\def\@seccntformatch#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 1em\relax} |
3830 |
|
3831 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
3832 |
% compsoc journals need extra spacing |
3833 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else |
3834 |
\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 1em\relax} |
3835 |
\fi\fi |
3836 |
|
3837 |
%v1.7 put {} after #6 to allow for some types of user font control |
3838 |
%and use \@@par rather than \par |
3839 |
\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{% |
3840 |
\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth |
3841 |
\let\@svsec\@empty |
3842 |
\else |
3843 |
\refstepcounter{#1}% |
3844 |
% load section label and spacer into \@svsec |
3845 |
\ifnum #2=1 |
3846 |
\protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformatch{#1}\relax}% |
3847 |
\else |
3848 |
\ifnum #2>2 |
3849 |
\protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformatinl{#1}\relax}% |
3850 |
\else |
3851 |
\protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}% |
3852 |
\fi |
3853 |
\fi |
3854 |
\fi% |
3855 |
\@tempskipa #5\relax |
3856 |
\ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@% tempskipa determines whether is treated as a high |
3857 |
\begingroup #6{\relax% or low level heading |
3858 |
\noindent % subsections are NOT indented |
3859 |
% print top level headings. \@svsec is label, #8 is heading title |
3860 |
% IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal |
3861 |
{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}{\interlinepenalty \@M #8\@@par}}% |
3862 |
\endgroup |
3863 |
\addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else |
3864 |
\protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}% |
3865 |
\else % printout low level headings |
3866 |
% svsechd seems to swallow the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{} |
3867 |
% got rid of sectionmark stuff |
3868 |
\def\@svsechd{#6{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec #8\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}% |
3869 |
\addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else |
3870 |
\protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}}% |
3871 |
\fi%skip down |
3872 |
\@xsect{#5}} |
3873 |
|
3874 |
|
3875 |
% section* handler |
3876 |
%v1.7 put {} after #4 to allow for some types of user font control |
3877 |
%and use \@@par rather than \par |
3878 |
\def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{\@tempskipa #3\relax |
3879 |
\ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@ |
3880 |
%\begingroup #4\@hangfrom{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\par}\endgroup |
3881 |
% IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal |
3882 |
\begingroup \noindent #4{\relax{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\@@par}}\endgroup |
3883 |
% svsechd swallows the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{} |
3884 |
\else \def\@svsechd{#4{\hskip #1\relax #5\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}}\fi |
3885 |
\@xsect{#3}} |
3886 |
|
3887 |
|
3888 |
%% SECTION heading spacing and font |
3889 |
%% |
3890 |
% arguments are: #1 - sectiontype name |
3891 |
% (for \@sect) #2 - section level |
3892 |
% #3 - section heading indent |
3893 |
% #4 - top separation (absolute value used, neg indicates not to indent main text) |
3894 |
% If negative, make stretch parts negative too! |
3895 |
% #5 - (absolute value used) positive: bottom separation after heading, |
3896 |
% negative: amount to indent main text after heading |
3897 |
% Both #4 and #5 negative means to indent main text and use negative top separation |
3898 |
% #6 - font control |
3899 |
% You've got to have \normalfont\normalsize in the font specs below to prevent |
3900 |
% trouble when you do something like: |
3901 |
% \section{Note}{\ttfamily TT-TEXT} is known to ... |
3902 |
% IEEE sometimes REALLY stretches the area before a section |
3903 |
% heading by up to about 0.5in. However, it may not be a good |
3904 |
% idea to let LaTeX have quite this much rubber. |
3905 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% |
3906 |
% IEEE wants section heading spacing to decrease for conference mode |
3907 |
\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}% |
3908 |
{1sp}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}% |
3909 |
\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}% |
3910 |
{1sp}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% |
3911 |
\else % for journals |
3912 |
\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{3.0ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}% V1.6 3.0ex from 3.5ex |
3913 |
{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}% |
3914 |
\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{3.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}% |
3915 |
{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% |
3916 |
\fi |
3917 |
|
3918 |
% for both journals and conferences |
3919 |
% decided to put in a little rubber above the section, might help somebody |
3920 |
\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}% |
3921 |
{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% |
3922 |
\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}% |
3923 |
{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% |
3924 |
|
3925 |
|
3926 |
% compsoc |
3927 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
3928 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
3929 |
% compsoc conference |
3930 |
\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}% |
3931 |
{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\large\bfseries}}% |
3932 |
\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}% |
3933 |
{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\sublargesize\bfseries}}% |
3934 |
\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}% |
3935 |
{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}% |
3936 |
\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}% |
3937 |
{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}% |
3938 |
\else% compsoc journals |
3939 |
% use negative top separation as compsoc journals do not indent paragraphs after section titles |
3940 |
\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{-3ex plus -2ex minus -1.5ex}% |
3941 |
{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\large\sffamily\bfseries\scshape}}% |
3942 |
% Note that subsection and smaller may not be correct for the Computer Society, |
3943 |
% I have to look up an example. |
3944 |
\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{-3.5ex plus -1.5ex minus -1.5ex}% |
3945 |
{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\bfseries}}% |
3946 |
\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{-2.5ex plus -1ex minus -1ex}% |
3947 |
{0.5ex plus 0.5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\itshape}}% |
3948 |
\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{-0ex plus -0.1ex minus -0.1ex}% |
3949 |
{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}% |
3950 |
\fi\fi |
3951 |
|
3952 |
|
3953 |
|
3954 |
|
3955 |
%% ENVIRONMENTS |
3956 |
% "box" symbols at end of proofs |
3957 |
\def\IEEEQEDclosed{\mbox{\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{1.3ex}}} % for a filled box |
3958 |
% V1.6 some journals use an open box instead that will just fit around a closed one |
3959 |
\def\IEEEQEDopen{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.2pt}\fbox{\rule[0pt]{0pt}{1.3ex}\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{0pt}}}} |
3960 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
3961 |
\def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDopen} % default to open for compsoc |
3962 |
\else |
3963 |
\def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDclosed} % otherwise default to closed |
3964 |
\fi |
3965 |
|
3966 |
% v1.7 name change to avoid namespace collision with amsthm. Also add support |
3967 |
% for an optional argument. |
3968 |
\def\IEEEproof{\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEproof}{\@IEEEproof[\IEEEproofname]}} |
3969 |
\def\@IEEEproof[#1]{\par\noindent\hspace{2em}{\itshape #1: }} |
3970 |
\def\endIEEEproof{\hspace*{\fill}~\IEEEQED\par} |
3971 |
|
3972 |
|
3973 |
%\itemindent is set to \z@ by list, so define new temporary variable |
3974 |
\newdimen\@IEEEtmpitemindent |
3975 |
\def\@begintheorem#1#2{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\topsep 0pt\rmfamily\trivlist% |
3976 |
\item[\hskip \labelsep{\indent\itshape #1\ #2:}]\itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent} |
3977 |
\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\topsep 0pt\rmfamily \trivlist% |
3978 |
% V1.6 IEEE is back to using () around theorem names which are also in italics |
3979 |
% Thanks to Christian Peel for reporting this. |
3980 |
\item[\hskip\labelsep{\indent\itshape #1\ #2\ (#3):}]\itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent} |
3981 |
% V1.7 remove bogus \unskip that caused equations in theorems to collide with |
3982 |
% lines below. |
3983 |
\def\@endtheorem{\endtrivlist} |
3984 |
|
3985 |
% V1.6 |
3986 |
% display command for the section the theorem is in - so that \thesection |
3987 |
% is not used as this will be in Roman numerals when we want arabic. |
3988 |
% LaTeX2e uses \def\@thmcounter#1{\noexpand\arabic{#1}} for the theorem number |
3989 |
% (second part) display and \def\@thmcountersep{.} as a separator. |
3990 |
% V1.7 intercept calls to the section counter and reroute to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection |
3991 |
% to allow \appendix(ices} to override as needed. |
3992 |
% |
3993 |
% special handler for sections, allows appendix(ices) to override |
3994 |
\gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection#1{\arabic{#1}} |
3995 |
% string macro |
3996 |
\edef\@IEEEstringsection{section} |
3997 |
|
3998 |
% redefine the #1#2[#3] form of newtheorem to use a hook to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection |
3999 |
% if section in_counter is used |
4000 |
\def\@xnthm#1#2[#3]{% |
4001 |
\expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname |
4002 |
{\@definecounter{#1}\@newctr{#1}[#3]% |
4003 |
\edef\@IEEEstringtmp{#3} |
4004 |
\ifx\@IEEEstringtmp\@IEEEstringsection |
4005 |
\expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{% |
4006 |
\noexpand\@IEEEthmcounterinsection{#3}\@thmcountersep |
4007 |
\@thmcounter{#1}}% |
4008 |
\else |
4009 |
\expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{% |
4010 |
\expandafter\noexpand\csname the#3\endcsname \@thmcountersep |
4011 |
\@thmcounter{#1}}% |
4012 |
\fi |
4013 |
\global\@namedef{#1}{\@thm{#1}{#2}}% |
4014 |
\global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}} |
4015 |
|
4016 |
|
4017 |
|
4018 |
%% SET UP THE DEFAULT PAGESTYLE |
4019 |
\ps@headings |
4020 |
\pagenumbering{arabic} |
4021 |
|
4022 |
% normally the page counter starts at 1 |
4023 |
\setcounter{page}{1} |
4024 |
% however, for peerreview the cover sheet is page 0 or page -1 |
4025 |
% (for duplex printing) |
4026 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview |
4027 |
\if@twoside |
4028 |
\setcounter{page}{-1} |
4029 |
\else |
4030 |
\setcounter{page}{0} |
4031 |
\fi |
4032 |
\fi |
4033 |
|
4034 |
% standard book class behavior - let bottom line float up and down as |
4035 |
% needed when single sided |
4036 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside\else\raggedbottom\fi |
4037 |
% if two column - turn on twocolumn, allow word spacings to stretch more and |
4038 |
% enforce a rigid position for the last lines |
4039 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn |
4040 |
% the peer review option delays invoking twocolumn |
4041 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else |
4042 |
\twocolumn |
4043 |
\fi |
4044 |
\sloppy |
4045 |
\flushbottom |
4046 |
\fi |
4047 |
|
4048 |
|
4049 |
|
4050 |
|
4051 |
% \APPENDIX and \APPENDICES definitions |
4052 |
|
4053 |
% This is the \@ifmtarg command from the LaTeX ifmtarg package |
4054 |
% by Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau |
4055 |
% \@ifmtarg is used to determine if an argument to a command |
4056 |
% is present or not. |
4057 |
% For instance: |
4058 |
% \@ifmtarg{#1}{\typeout{empty}}{\typeout{has something}} |
4059 |
% \@ifmtarg is used with our redefined \section command if |
4060 |
% \appendices is invoked. |
4061 |
% The command \section will behave slightly differently depending |
4062 |
% on whether the user specifies a title: |
4063 |
% \section{My appendix title} |
4064 |
% or not: |
4065 |
% \section{} |
4066 |
% This way, we can eliminate the blank lines where the title |
4067 |
% would be, and the unneeded : after Appendix in the table of |
4068 |
% contents |
4069 |
\begingroup |
4070 |
\catcode`\Q=3 |
4071 |
\long\gdef\@ifmtarg#1{\@xifmtarg#1QQ\@secondoftwo\@firstoftwo\@nil} |
4072 |
\long\gdef\@xifmtarg#1#2Q#3#4#5\@nil{#4} |
4073 |
\endgroup |
4074 |
% end of \@ifmtarg defs |
4075 |
|
4076 |
|
4077 |
% V1.7 |
4078 |
% command that allows the one time saving of the original definition |
4079 |
% of section to \@IEEEappendixsavesection for \appendix or \appendices |
4080 |
% we don't save \section here as it may be redefined later by other |
4081 |
% packages (hyperref.sty, etc.) |
4082 |
\def\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce{\let\@IEEEappendixsavesection\section |
4083 |
\let\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\relax} |
4084 |
|
4085 |
% neat trick to grab and process the argument from \section{argument} |
4086 |
% we process differently if the user invoked \section{} with no |
4087 |
% argument (title) |
4088 |
% note we reroute the call to the old \section* |
4089 |
\def\@IEEEprocessthesectionargument#1{% |
4090 |
\@ifmtarg{#1}{% |
4091 |
\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\thesectiondis}% |
4092 |
\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname~\thesection}}{% |
4093 |
\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\thesectiondis \\* #1}% |
4094 |
\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname~\thesection: #1}}} |
4095 |
|
4096 |
% we use this if the user calls \section{} after |
4097 |
% \appendix-- which has no meaning. So, we ignore the |
4098 |
% command and its argument. Then, warn the user. |
4099 |
\def\@IEEEdestroythesectionargument#1{\typeout{** WARNING: Ignoring useless |
4100 |
\protect\section\space in Appendix (line \the\inputlineno).}} |
4101 |
|
4102 |
|
4103 |
% remember \thesection forms will be displayed in \ref calls |
4104 |
% and in the Table of Contents. |
4105 |
% The \sectiondis form is used in the actual heading itself |
4106 |
|
4107 |
% appendix command for one single appendix |
4108 |
% normally has no heading. However, if you want a |
4109 |
% heading, you can do so via the optional argument: |
4110 |
% \appendix[Optional Heading] |
4111 |
\def\appendix{\relax} |
4112 |
\renewcommand{\appendix}[1][]{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par |
4113 |
% v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique |
4114 |
\gdef\theHsection{Appendix.A}% |
4115 |
% v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section |
4116 |
\xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}% |
4117 |
\setcounter{section}{0}% |
4118 |
\setcounter{subsection}{0}% |
4119 |
\setcounter{subsubsection}{0}% |
4120 |
\setcounter{paragraph}{0}% |
4121 |
\gdef\thesection{A}% |
4122 |
\gdef\thesectiondis{}% |
4123 |
\gdef\thesubsection{\Alph{subsection}}% |
4124 |
\gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A} |
4125 |
\refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter |
4126 |
\@ifmtarg{#1}{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname}% |
4127 |
\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname}}{% |
4128 |
\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\\* #1}% |
4129 |
\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname: #1}}% |
4130 |
% redefine \section command for appendix |
4131 |
% leave \section* as is |
4132 |
\def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{% |
4133 |
\@IEEEdestroythesectionargument}}% throw out the argument |
4134 |
% of the normal form |
4135 |
} |
4136 |
|
4137 |
|
4138 |
|
4139 |
% appendices command for multiple appendices |
4140 |
% user then calls \section with an argument (possibly empty) to |
4141 |
% declare the individual appendices |
4142 |
\def\appendices{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par |
4143 |
% v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique |
4144 |
\gdef\theHsection{Appendix.\Alph{section}}% |
4145 |
% v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section |
4146 |
\xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}% |
4147 |
\setcounter{section}{-1}% we want \refstepcounter to use section 0 |
4148 |
\setcounter{subsection}{0}% |
4149 |
\setcounter{subsubsection}{0}% |
4150 |
\setcounter{paragraph}{0}% |
4151 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices% |
4152 |
\gdef\thesection{\Roman{section}}% |
4153 |
\gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}}% |
4154 |
\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}.}}% |
4155 |
\gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A\arabic{##1}} |
4156 |
\else% |
4157 |
\gdef\thesection{\Alph{section}}% |
4158 |
\gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}}% |
4159 |
\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}.}}% |
4160 |
\gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{\Alph{##1}} |
4161 |
\fi% |
4162 |
\refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter |
4163 |
\setcounter{section}{0}% NEXT \section will be the FIRST appendix |
4164 |
% redefine \section command for appendices |
4165 |
% leave \section* as is |
4166 |
\def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{% process the *-form |
4167 |
\refstepcounter{section}% or is a new section so, |
4168 |
\@IEEEprocessthesectionargument}}% process the argument |
4169 |
% of the normal form |
4170 |
} |
4171 |
|
4172 |
|
4173 |
|
4174 |
% \IEEEPARstart |
4175 |
% Definition for the big two line drop cap letter at the beginning of the |
4176 |
% first paragraph of journal papers. The first argument is the first letter |
4177 |
% of the first word, the second argument is the remaining letters of the |
4178 |
% first word which will be rendered in upper case. |
4179 |
% In V1.6 this has been completely rewritten to: |
4180 |
% |
4181 |
% 1. no longer have problems when the user begins an environment |
4182 |
% within the paragraph that uses \IEEEPARstart. |
4183 |
% 2. auto-detect and use the current font family |
4184 |
% 3. revise handling of the space at the end of the first word so that |
4185 |
% interword glue will now work as normal. |
4186 |
% 4. produce correctly aligned edges for the (two) indented lines. |
4187 |
% |
4188 |
% We generalize things via control macros - playing with these is fun too. |
4189 |
% |
4190 |
% V1.7 added more control macros to make it easy for IEEEtrantools.sty users |
4191 |
% to change the font style. |
4192 |
% |
4193 |
% the number of lines that are indented to clear it |
4194 |
% may need to increase if using decenders |
4195 |
\def\@IEEEPARstartDROPLINES{2} |
4196 |
% minimum number of lines left on a page to allow a \@IEEEPARstart |
4197 |
% Does not take into consideration rubber shrink, so it tends to |
4198 |
% be overly cautious |
4199 |
\def\@IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES{2} |
4200 |
% V1.7 the height of the drop cap is adjusted to match the height of this text |
4201 |
% in the current font (when \IEEEPARstart is called). |
4202 |
\def\@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT{T} |
4203 |
% the depth the letter is lowered below the baseline |
4204 |
% the height (and size) of the letter is determined by the sum |
4205 |
% of this value and the height of the \@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current |
4206 |
% font. It is a good idea to set this value in terms of the baselineskip |
4207 |
% so that it can respond to changes therein. |
4208 |
\def\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH{1.1\baselineskip} |
4209 |
% V1.7 the font the drop cap will be rendered in, |
4210 |
% can take zero or one argument. |
4211 |
\def\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\bfseries} |
4212 |
% V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify |
4213 |
% the drop cap letter, can take zero or one argument. |
4214 |
\def\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{\MakeUppercase} |
4215 |
% V1.7 the font that will be used to render the rest of the word, |
4216 |
% can take zero or one argument. |
4217 |
\def\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\relax} |
4218 |
% V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify |
4219 |
% the rest of the word, can take zero or one argument. |
4220 |
\def\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\MakeUppercase} |
4221 |
% This is the horizontal separation distance from the drop letter to the main text. |
4222 |
% Lengths that depend on the font (e.g., ex, em, etc.) will be referenced |
4223 |
% to the font that is active when \IEEEPARstart is called. |
4224 |
\def\@IEEEPARstartSEP{0.15em} |
4225 |
% V1.7 horizontal offset applied to the left of the drop cap. |
4226 |
\def\@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET{0em} |
4227 |
% V1.7 Italic correction command applied at the end of the drop cap. |
4228 |
\def\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT{\/} |
4229 |
|
4230 |
% V1.7 compoc uses nonbold drop cap and small caps word style |
4231 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
4232 |
\def\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\mdseries} |
4233 |
\def\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\scshape} |
4234 |
\def\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\relax} |
4235 |
\fi |
4236 |
|
4237 |
% definition of \IEEEPARstart |
4238 |
% THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING AREA, DO NOT ALLOW SPACES WITHIN THESE LINES |
4239 |
% |
4240 |
% The token \@IEEEPARstartfont will be globally defined after the first use |
4241 |
% of \IEEEPARstart and will be a font command which creates the big letter |
4242 |
% The first argument is the first letter of the first word and the second |
4243 |
% argument is the rest of the first word(s). |
4244 |
\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{\par{% |
4245 |
% if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start |
4246 |
% on a new one |
4247 |
\@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES\baselineskip}{\relax}% |
4248 |
% V1.7 move this up here in case user uses \textbf for \@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE |
4249 |
% which uses command \leavevmode which causes an unwanted \indent to be issued |
4250 |
\noindent |
4251 |
% calculate the desired height of the big letter |
4252 |
% it extends from the top of \@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current font |
4253 |
% down to \@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH below the current baseline |
4254 |
\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT}% |
4255 |
\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}% |
4256 |
% extract the name of the current font in bold |
4257 |
% and place it in \@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME |
4258 |
\def\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD##1 ##2\relax{##1}% |
4259 |
{\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\selectfont\edef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE{\fontname\font\space}% |
4260 |
\xdef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME{\expandafter\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE\relax}}}% |
4261 |
% define a font based on this name with a point size equal to the desired |
4262 |
% height of the drop letter |
4263 |
\font\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax% |
4264 |
% save this value as a counter (integer) value (sp points) |
4265 |
\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% |
4266 |
% now get the height of the actual letter produced by this font size |
4267 |
\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1}}% |
4268 |
% If something bogus happens like the first argument is empty or the |
4269 |
% current font is strange, do not allow a zero height. |
4270 |
\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0pt\relax% |
4271 |
\typeout{** WARNING: IEEEPARstart drop letter has zero height! (line \the\inputlineno)}% |
4272 |
\typeout{ Forcing the drop letter font size to 10pt.}% |
4273 |
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=10pt% |
4274 |
\fi% |
4275 |
% and store it as a counter |
4276 |
\@IEEEtrantmpcountB=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% |
4277 |
% Since a font size doesn't exactly correspond to the height of the capital |
4278 |
% letters in that font, the actual height of the letter, \@IEEEtrantmpcountB, |
4279 |
% will be less than that desired, \@IEEEtrantmpcountA |
4280 |
% we need to raise the font size, \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA |
4281 |
% by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA / \@IEEEtrantmpcountB |
4282 |
% But, TeX doesn't have floating point division, so we have to use integer |
4283 |
% division. Hence the use of the counters. |
4284 |
% We need to reduce the denominator so that the loss of the remainder will |
4285 |
% have minimal affect on the accuracy of the result |
4286 |
\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by 200% |
4287 |
\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountB% |
4288 |
% Then reequalize things when we use TeX's ability to multiply by |
4289 |
% floating point values |
4290 |
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0.005\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% |
4291 |
\multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA% |
4292 |
% \@IEEEPARstartfont is globaly set to the calculated font of the big letter |
4293 |
% We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to to create the |
4294 |
% big letter. |
4295 |
\global\font\@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% |
4296 |
% Now set \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA to the width of the big letter |
4297 |
% We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to set the |
4298 |
% hanging indent |
4299 |
\settowidth{\global\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartfont |
4300 |
\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}}}% |
4301 |
% end of the isolated calculation environment |
4302 |
% add in the extra clearance we want |
4303 |
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEPARstartSEP\relax% |
4304 |
% add in the optional offset |
4305 |
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET\relax% |
4306 |
% V1.7 don't allow negative offsets to produce negative hanging indents |
4307 |
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA |
4308 |
\ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB < 0 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 0pt\fi |
4309 |
% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA has the width of the big letter plus the |
4310 |
% separation space and \@IEEEPARstartfont is the font we need to use |
4311 |
% Now, we make the letter and issue the hanging indent command |
4312 |
% The letter is placed in a box of zero width and height so that other |
4313 |
% text won't be displaced by it. |
4314 |
\hangindent\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\hangafter=-\@IEEEPARstartDROPLINES% |
4315 |
\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}% |
4316 |
\raisebox{-\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}[0pt][0pt]{\hspace{\@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET}% |
4317 |
\@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}% |
4318 |
\hspace{\@IEEEPARstartSEP}}}% |
4319 |
{\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\selectfont#2}}}} |
4320 |
|
4321 |
|
4322 |
|
4323 |
|
4324 |
|
4325 |
|
4326 |
% determines if the space remaining on a given page is equal to or greater |
4327 |
% than the specified space of argument one |
4328 |
% if not, execute argument two (only if the remaining space is greater than zero) |
4329 |
% and issue a \newpage |
4330 |
% |
4331 |
% example: \@IEEEtranneedspace{2in}{\vfill} |
4332 |
% |
4333 |
% Does not take into consideration rubber shrinkage, so it tends to |
4334 |
% be overly cautious |
4335 |
% Based on an example posted by Donald Arseneau |
4336 |
% Note this macro uses \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB internally for calculations, |
4337 |
% so DO NOT PASS \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB to this routine |
4338 |
% if you need a dimen register, import with \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA instead |
4339 |
\def\@IEEEtranneedspace#1#2{\penalty-100\begingroup%shield temp variable |
4340 |
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\pagegoal\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB-\pagetotal% space left |
4341 |
\ifdim #1>\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax% not enough space left |
4342 |
\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB>\z@\relax #2\fi% |
4343 |
\newpage% |
4344 |
\fi\endgroup} |
4345 |
|
4346 |
|
4347 |
|
4348 |
% IEEEbiography ENVIRONMENT |
4349 |
% Allows user to enter biography leaving place for picture (adapts to font size) |
4350 |
% As of V1.5, a new optional argument allows you to have a real graphic! |
4351 |
% V1.5 and later also fixes the "colliding biographies" which could happen when a |
4352 |
% biography's text was shorter than the space for the photo. |
4353 |
% MDS 7/2001 |
4354 |
% V1.6 prevent multiple biographies from making multiple TOC entries |
4355 |
\newif\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade |
4356 |
\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadetrue |
4357 |
|
4358 |
% biography counter so hyperref can jump directly to the biographies |
4359 |
% and not just the previous section |
4360 |
\newcounter{IEEEbiography} |
4361 |
\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{0} |
4362 |
|
4363 |
% photo area size |
4364 |
\def\@IEEEBIOphotowidth{1.0in} % width of the biography photo area |
4365 |
\def\@IEEEBIOphotodepth{1.25in} % depth (height) of the biography photo area |
4366 |
% area cleared for photo |
4367 |
\def\@IEEEBIOhangwidth{1.14in} % width cleared for the biography photo area |
4368 |
\def\@IEEEBIOhangdepth{1.25in} % depth cleared for the biography photo area |
4369 |
% actual depth will be a multiple of |
4370 |
% \baselineskip, rounded up |
4371 |
\def\@IEEEBIOskipN{4\baselineskip}% nominal value of the vskip above the biography |
4372 |
|
4373 |
\newenvironment{IEEEbiography}[2][]{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize% |
4374 |
\unitlength 1in\parskip=0pt\par\parindent 1em\interlinepenalty500% |
4375 |
% we need enough space to support the hanging indent |
4376 |
% the nominal value of the spacer |
4377 |
% and one extra line for good measure |
4378 |
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth% |
4379 |
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEBIOskipN% |
4380 |
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by 1\baselineskip% |
4381 |
% if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start |
4382 |
% with a new one |
4383 |
\@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\relax}% |
4384 |
% nominal spacer can strech, not shrink use 1fil so user can out stretch with \vfill |
4385 |
\vskip \@IEEEBIOskipN plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip% |
4386 |
% the default box for where the photo goes |
4387 |
\def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox{% |
4388 |
\begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}\centering PLACE\\ PHOTO\\ HERE \end{minipage}}}}% |
4389 |
% |
4390 |
% detect if the optional argument was supplied, this requires the |
4391 |
% \@ifmtarg command as defined in the appendix section above |
4392 |
% and if so, override the default box with what they want |
4393 |
\@ifmtarg{#1}{\relax}{\def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{\mbox{\begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}% |
4394 |
\centering% |
4395 |
#1% |
4396 |
\end{minipage}}}}% end if optional argument supplied |
4397 |
% Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before |
4398 |
\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade% |
4399 |
% link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump |
4400 |
% to the biography, not the previous section |
4401 |
\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}% |
4402 |
\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% |
4403 |
\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}% |
4404 |
\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse% |
4405 |
\fi% |
4406 |
% one more biography |
4407 |
\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% |
4408 |
% Make an entry for this name into the table of contents |
4409 |
\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#2}% |
4410 |
% V1.6 properly handle if a new paragraph should occur while the |
4411 |
% hanging indent is still active. Do this by redefining \par so |
4412 |
% that it will not start a new paragraph. (But it will appear to the |
4413 |
% user as if it did.) Also, strip any leading pars, newlines, or spaces. |
4414 |
\let\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD=\par% save the original \par command |
4415 |
\edef\par{\hfil\break\indent}% the new \par will not be a "real" \par |
4416 |
\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}% get height of biography box |
4417 |
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth% |
4418 |
\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% countA has the hang depth |
4419 |
\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \baselineskip% calculates lines needed to produce the hang depth |
4420 |
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by 1% ensure we overestimate |
4421 |
% set the hanging indent |
4422 |
\hangindent\@IEEEBIOhangwidth% |
4423 |
\hangafter-\@IEEEtrantmpcountA% |
4424 |
% reference the top of the photo area to the top of a capital T |
4425 |
\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\mbox{T}}% |
4426 |
% set the photo box, give it zero width and height so as not to disturb anything |
4427 |
\noindent\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEBIOhangwidth}\raisebox{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}[0pt][0pt]{% |
4428 |
\raisebox{-\@IEEEBIOphotodepth}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}}}% |
4429 |
% now place the author name and begin the bio text |
4430 |
\noindent\textbf{#2\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\let\par=\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD\par% |
4431 |
% 7/2001 V1.5 detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo area |
4432 |
% and pad the unused area - preventing a collision from the next biography entry |
4433 |
% MDS |
4434 |
\ifnum \prevgraf <\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax% detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo |
4435 |
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -\prevgraf% calculate how many lines we need to pad |
4436 |
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax% we compensate for the fact that we indented an extra line |
4437 |
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselineskip% calculate the length of the padding |
4438 |
\multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA% |
4439 |
\noindent\rule{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}% insert an invisible support strut |
4440 |
\fi% |
4441 |
\par\normalfont} |
4442 |
|
4443 |
|
4444 |
|
4445 |
% V1.6 |
4446 |
% added biography without a photo environment |
4447 |
\newenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{% |
4448 |
% Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before |
4449 |
\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade% |
4450 |
% link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump |
4451 |
% to the biography, not the previous section |
4452 |
\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}% |
4453 |
\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% |
4454 |
\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}% |
4455 |
\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse% |
4456 |
\fi% |
4457 |
% one more biography |
4458 |
\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% |
4459 |
% Make an entry for this name into the table of contents |
4460 |
\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#1}% |
4461 |
\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize\interlinepenalty500% |
4462 |
\vskip 4\baselineskip plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip% |
4463 |
\parskip=0pt\par% |
4464 |
\noindent\textbf{#1\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\par\normalfont} |
4465 |
|
4466 |
|
4467 |
% provide the user with some old font commands |
4468 |
% got this from article.cls |
4469 |
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm} |
4470 |
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf} |
4471 |
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt} |
4472 |
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf} |
4473 |
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit} |
4474 |
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl} |
4475 |
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc} |
4476 |
\DeclareRobustCommand*\cal{\@fontswitch\relax\mathcal} |
4477 |
\DeclareRobustCommand*\mit{\@fontswitch\relax\mathnormal} |
4478 |
|
4479 |
|
4480 |
% SPECIAL PAPER NOTICE COMMANDS |
4481 |
% |
4482 |
% holds the special notice text |
4483 |
\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{\relax} |
4484 |
|
4485 |
% for special papers, like invited papers, the user can do: |
4486 |
% \IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)} before \maketitle |
4487 |
\def\IEEEspecialpapernotice#1{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% |
4488 |
\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{{\Large#1\vspace*{1em}}}% |
4489 |
\else% |
4490 |
\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{{\\*[1.5ex]\sublargesize\textit{#1}}\vspace*{-2ex}}% |
4491 |
\fi} |
4492 |
|
4493 |
|
4494 |
|
4495 |
|
4496 |
% PUBLISHER ID COMMANDS |
4497 |
% to insert a publisher's ID footer |
4498 |
% V1.6 \IEEEpubid has been changed so that the change in page size and style |
4499 |
% occurs in \maketitle. \IEEEpubid must now be issued prior to \maketitle |
4500 |
% use \IEEEpubidadjcol as before - in the second column of the title page |
4501 |
% These changes allow \maketitle to take the reduced page height into |
4502 |
% consideration when dynamically setting the space between the author |
4503 |
% names and the maintext. |
4504 |
% |
4505 |
% the amount the main text is pulled up to make room for the |
4506 |
% publisher's ID footer |
4507 |
% IEEE uses about 1.3\baselineskip for journals, |
4508 |
% dynamic title spacing will clean up the fraction |
4509 |
\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{1.3\baselineskip} |
4510 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote |
4511 |
% for technotes it must be an integer of baselineskip as there can be no |
4512 |
% dynamic title spacing for two column mode technotes (the title is in the |
4513 |
% in first column) and we should maintain an integer number of lines in the |
4514 |
% second column |
4515 |
% There are some examples (such as older issues of "Transactions on |
4516 |
% Information Theory") in which IEEE really pulls the text off the ID for |
4517 |
% technotes - about 0.55in (or 4\baselineskip). We'll use 2\baselineskip |
4518 |
% and call it even. |
4519 |
\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{2\baselineskip} |
4520 |
\fi |
4521 |
|
4522 |
% V1.7 compsoc does not use a pullup |
4523 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
4524 |
\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{0pt} |
4525 |
\fi |
4526 |
|
4527 |
% holds the ID text |
4528 |
\def\@IEEEpubid{\relax} |
4529 |
|
4530 |
% flag so \maketitle can tell if \IEEEpubid was called |
4531 |
\newif\if@IEEEusingpubid |
4532 |
\global\@IEEEusingpubidfalse |
4533 |
% issue this command in the page to have the ID at the bottom |
4534 |
% V1.6 use before \maketitle |
4535 |
\def\IEEEpubid#1{\def\@IEEEpubid{#1}\global\@IEEEusingpubidtrue} |
4536 |
|
4537 |
|
4538 |
% command which will pull up (shorten) the column it is executed in |
4539 |
% to make room for the publisher ID. Place in the second column of |
4540 |
% the title page when using \IEEEpubid |
4541 |
% Is smart enough not to do anything when in single column text or |
4542 |
% if the user hasn't called \IEEEpubid |
4543 |
% currently needed in for the second column of a page with the |
4544 |
% publisher ID. If not needed in future releases, please provide this |
4545 |
% command and define it as \relax for backward compatibility |
4546 |
% v1.6b do not allow command to operate if the peer review option has been |
4547 |
% selected because \IEEEpubidadjcol will not be on the cover page. |
4548 |
% V1.7 do nothing if compsoc |
4549 |
\def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else |
4550 |
\if@twocolumn\if@IEEEusingpubid\enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}\fi\fi\fi\fi} |
4551 |
|
4552 |
% Special thanks to Peter Wilson, Daniel Luecking, and the other |
4553 |
% gurus at comp.text.tex, for helping me to understand how best to |
4554 |
% implement the IEEEpubid command in LaTeX. |
4555 |
|
4556 |
|
4557 |
|
4558 |
%% Lockout some commands under various conditions |
4559 |
|
4560 |
% general purpose bit bucket |
4561 |
\newsavebox{\@IEEEtranrubishbin} |
4562 |
|
4563 |
% flags to prevent multiple warning messages |
4564 |
\newif\if@IEEEWARNthanks |
4565 |
\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart |
4566 |
\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography |
4567 |
\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto |
4568 |
\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid |
4569 |
\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol |
4570 |
\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership |
4571 |
\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext |
4572 |
\@IEEEWARNthankstrue |
4573 |
\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstarttrue |
4574 |
\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographytrue |
4575 |
\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophototrue |
4576 |
\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidtrue |
4577 |
\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcoltrue |
4578 |
\@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershiptrue |
4579 |
\@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletexttrue |
4580 |
|
4581 |
|
4582 |
%% Lockout some commands when in various modes, but allow them to be restored if needed |
4583 |
%% |
4584 |
% save commands which might be locked out |
4585 |
% so that the user can later restore them if needed |
4586 |
\let\@IEEESAVECMDthanks\thanks |
4587 |
\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart\IEEEPARstart |
4588 |
\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography\IEEEbiography |
4589 |
\let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography\endIEEEbiography |
4590 |
\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto\IEEEbiographynophoto |
4591 |
\let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto\endIEEEbiographynophoto |
4592 |
\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid\IEEEpubid |
4593 |
\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol\IEEEpubidadjcol |
4594 |
\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership\IEEEmembership |
4595 |
\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext\IEEEaftertitletext |
4596 |
|
4597 |
|
4598 |
% disable \IEEEPARstart when in draft mode |
4599 |
% This may have originally been done because the pre-V1.6 drop letter |
4600 |
% algorithm had problems with a non-unity baselinestretch |
4601 |
% At any rate, it seems too formal to have a drop letter in a draft |
4602 |
% paper. |
4603 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls |
4604 |
\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** ATTENTION: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart |
4605 |
is disabled in draft mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse} |
4606 |
\fi |
4607 |
% and for technotes |
4608 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote |
4609 |
\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart |
4610 |
is locked out for technotes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse} |
4611 |
\fi |
4612 |
|
4613 |
|
4614 |
% lockout unneeded commands when in conference mode |
4615 |
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
4616 |
% when locked out, \thanks, \IEEEbiography, \IEEEbiographynophoto, \IEEEpubid, |
4617 |
% \IEEEmembership and \IEEEaftertitletext will all swallow their given text. |
4618 |
% \IEEEPARstart will output a normal character instead |
4619 |
% warn the user about these commands only once to prevent the console screen |
4620 |
% from filling up with redundant messages |
4621 |
\def\thanks#1{\if@IEEEWARNthanks\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\thanks |
4622 |
is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNthanksfalse} |
4623 |
\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart |
4624 |
is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse} |
4625 |
|
4626 |
|
4627 |
% LaTeX treats environments and commands with optional arguments differently. |
4628 |
% the actual ("internal") command is stored as \\commandname |
4629 |
% (accessed via \csname\string\commandname\endcsname ) |
4630 |
% the "external" command \commandname is a macro with code to determine |
4631 |
% whether or not the optional argument is presented and to provide the |
4632 |
% default if it is absent. So, in order to save and restore such a command |
4633 |
% we would have to save and restore \\commandname as well. But, if LaTeX |
4634 |
% ever changes the way it names the internal names, the trick would break. |
4635 |
% Instead let us just define a new environment so that the internal |
4636 |
% name can be left undisturbed. |
4637 |
\newenvironment{@IEEEbogusbiography}[2][]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiography |
4638 |
is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographyfalse% |
4639 |
\setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax} |
4640 |
% and make biography point to our bogus biography |
4641 |
\let\IEEEbiography=\@IEEEbogusbiography |
4642 |
\let\endIEEEbiography=\end@IEEEbogusbiography |
4643 |
|
4644 |
\renewenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiographynophoto |
4645 |
is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophotofalse% |
4646 |
\setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax} |
4647 |
|
4648 |
\def\IEEEpubid#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubid |
4649 |
is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidfalse} |
4650 |
\def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubidadjcol |
4651 |
is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcolfalse} |
4652 |
\def\IEEEmembership#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEmembership |
4653 |
is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershipfalse} |
4654 |
\def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEaftertitletext |
4655 |
is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletextfalse} |
4656 |
\fi |
4657 |
|
4658 |
|
4659 |
% provide a way to restore the commands that are locked out |
4660 |
\def\IEEEoverridecommandlockouts{% |
4661 |
\typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding command lockouts (line \the\inputlineno).}% |
4662 |
\let\thanks\@IEEESAVECMDthanks% |
4663 |
\let\IEEEPARstart\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart% |
4664 |
\let\IEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography% |
4665 |
\let\endIEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography% |
4666 |
\let\IEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto% |
4667 |
\let\endIEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto% |
4668 |
\let\IEEEpubid\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid% |
4669 |
\let\IEEEpubidadjcol\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol% |
4670 |
\let\IEEEmembership\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership% |
4671 |
\let\IEEEaftertitletext\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext} |
4672 |
|
4673 |
|
4674 |
|
4675 |
% need a backslash character for typeout output |
4676 |
{\catcode`\|=0 \catcode`\\=12 |
4677 |
|xdef|@IEEEbackslash{\}} |
4678 |
|
4679 |
|
4680 |
% hook to allow easy disabling of all legacy warnings |
4681 |
\def\@IEEElegacywarn#1#2{\typeout{** ATTENTION: \@IEEEbackslash #1 is deprecated (line \the\inputlineno). |
4682 |
Use \@IEEEbackslash #2 instead.}} |
4683 |
|
4684 |
|
4685 |
% provide for legacy commands |
4686 |
\def\authorblockA{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockA}{IEEEauthorblockA}\IEEEauthorblockA} |
4687 |
\def\authorblockN{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockN}{IEEEauthorblockN}\IEEEauthorblockN} |
4688 |
\def\authorrefmark{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorrefmark}{IEEEauthorrefmark}\IEEEauthorrefmark} |
4689 |
\def\PARstart{\@IEEElegacywarn{PARstart}{IEEEPARstart}\IEEEPARstart} |
4690 |
\def\pubid{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubid}{IEEEpubid}\IEEEpubid} |
4691 |
\def\pubidadjcol{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubidadjcol}{IEEEpubidadjcol}\IEEEpubidadjcol} |
4692 |
\def\QED{\@IEEElegacywarn{QED}{IEEEQED}\IEEEQED} |
4693 |
\def\QEDclosed{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDclosed}{IEEEQEDclosed}\IEEEQEDclosed} |
4694 |
\def\QEDopen{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDopen}{IEEEQEDopen}\IEEEQEDopen} |
4695 |
\def\specialpapernotice{\@IEEElegacywarn{specialpapernotice}{IEEEspecialpapernotice}\IEEEspecialpapernotice} |
4696 |
|
4697 |
|
4698 |
|
4699 |
% provide for legacy environments |
4700 |
\def\biography{\@IEEElegacywarn{biography}{IEEEbiography}\IEEEbiography} |
4701 |
\def\biographynophoto{\@IEEElegacywarn{biographynophoto}{IEEEbiographynophoto}\IEEEbiographynophoto} |
4702 |
\def\keywords{\@IEEElegacywarn{keywords}{IEEEkeywords}\IEEEkeywords} |
4703 |
\def\endbiography{\endIEEEbiography} |
4704 |
\def\endbiographynophoto{\endIEEEbiographynophoto} |
4705 |
\def\endkeywords{\endIEEEkeywords} |
4706 |
|
4707 |
|
4708 |
% provide for legacy IED commands/lengths when possible |
4709 |
\let\labelindent\IEEElabelindent |
4710 |
\def\calcleftmargin{\@IEEElegacywarn{calcleftmargin}{IEEEcalcleftmargin}\IEEEcalcleftmargin} |
4711 |
\def\setlabelwidth{\@IEEElegacywarn{setlabelwidth}{IEEEsetlabelwidth}\IEEEsetlabelwidth} |
4712 |
\def\usemathlabelsep{\@IEEElegacywarn{usemathlabelsep}{IEEEusemathlabelsep}\IEEEusemathlabelsep} |
4713 |
\def\iedlabeljustifyc{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyc}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyc}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc} |
4714 |
\def\iedlabeljustifyl{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyl}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyl}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl} |
4715 |
\def\iedlabeljustifyr{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyr}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyr}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr} |
4716 |
|
4717 |
|
4718 |
|
4719 |
% let \proof use the IEEEtran version even after amsthm is loaded |
4720 |
% \proof is now deprecated in favor of \IEEEproof |
4721 |
\AtBeginDocument{\def\proof{\@IEEElegacywarn{proof}{IEEEproof}\IEEEproof}\def\endproof{\endIEEEproof}} |
4722 |
|
4723 |
% V1.7 \overrideIEEEmargins is no longer supported. |
4724 |
\def\overrideIEEEmargins{% |
4725 |
\typeout{** WARNING: \string\overrideIEEEmargins \space no longer supported (line \the\inputlineno).}% |
4726 |
\typeout{** Use the \string\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin, \string\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin \space controls instead.}} |
4727 |
|
4728 |
|
4729 |
\endinput |
4730 |
|
4731 |
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of IEEEtran.cls %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% |
4732 |
% That's all folks! |
4733 |
|